Home

CC-Link IE Controller Network Interface Board User's Manual (For

1. oc O 3 Stations that require routing parameter setting 5 a The setting is required for both the transient transmission request source and gt relay stations gt b For the relay stations two routing settings are required one from the request source to the request target and the other from the request target back to the X request source c The setting is not required for the request target ae In the example where the transient transmission is executed from 1Ns3 to 3Ns4 PS shown in the figure below the setting is required for the three stations S 1 Setting for 1Ns3 that requests the transient transmission Specify 3 for the Target Network No 1Ns4 for the Relay Station No and 1 for the Relay Network No Z 2 Setting for 1Ns4 that functions as a relay station z Specify 3 for the Target Network No 2Ns4 for the Relay Station No and 2 for the Relay Network No The return route setting is not required because it is specified in the setting for 2Ns4 2 3 Setting for 2Ns4 that function as a relay station The route setting to the transfer target is not required because the own station is on the same network with the transfer target network No 3 However the F return route setting is required Specify 1 the transfer source network No for SE the Target Network No 2MPpP1 for the Relay Station No and 2 for the Relay a5 Network
2. oc EEPE O 2 Communication test screen 5 O Error message Corrective action x Communication test was not normally done Check the settings of the routing parameter S Specify the value for the network number within the range of a5 Network No value is not entered 1 to 239 Specify network No value in one byte number within the Specify the value for the network number within the range of X range from 1 to 239 1 to 239 2 Specify the value for the station number within the range of 0 z Station No value is not entered a to 120 Pg Specify station No in one byte number within the range from Specify the value for the station number within the range of 0 jg 0 to 120 to 120 A Specify the value for the data length within the range of 1 to Data length value is not entered 900 Specify data length value in one byte number within the Specify the value for the data length within the range of 1 to S range from 1 to 900 900 Z oat J Specify the value for the communication count within the Communication count value is not entered fe range of 1 to 100 Specify communication count value in one byte number Specify the value for the communication count within the within the range from 1 to 100 range of 1 to 100 ey F 7 Specify the value for the communication monitor time within Communication monitor time value is not entered the range of 1 to 100 5a f rs Specify communication mon
3. Channel 2 5 Read by the Data sent from Channel 3 twiReceived data of Channel 4 mdReceive other station by ____ ____J_ Channel 4 mdReceiveEx me SEND Received data Channel 5 RECV function Received message are stored to the Channel 6 instruction Actual data target station Channel 7 channel specified Channel 8 by the sending Received data can station be stored up to 128 disregarding the channel numbers 4 Executed automatically by the driver The board receives data sent from the other station by the SEND instruction SEND function and stores data to the target station channel specified at the sending side After the board receives the data the driver automatically executes the RECV instruction and stores the received data to the reception buffer of the driver All data received and individually stored to channels of the board are stored to the one reception buffer of the driver which can store up to 128 of data Reads data of the specified channel number in the received order from the data stored in the reception buffer of the driver using mdReceive mdReceiveEx function lt Operation when 128 received data are already stored in the reception buffer of the driver gt When 128 received data are already stored in the reception buffer of the driver the subsequent data are received by the board once but the driver automatically discards th
4. Tracking cable Station No 1 Station No 2 ES POINT When a CC Link IE Controller Network board with a serial number whose first five digits are 10091 or lower or an SW1DNC MNETG B with the software version 1 04E or earlier is used the redundant CPU system cannot be accessed directly with the CC Link IE Controller Network interface board Relay the MELSECNET H network system to access the redundant CPU system 6 24 6 9 Target Settings 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS 6 10 Refresh Parameter Setting if The refresh parameters are designed to transfer link devices LX LY LB and LW of CC gt Link IE Controller Network board to the driver buffers LX LY LB and LW buffers of a gt personal computer to be used in user programs The refresh parameter settings are set on the Refresh parameter setting screen of the CC IE Control utility 2 CF Section 8 4 9 Refresh parameter setting screen O Refresh parameter setting fe m N r Assignment method A i Points Stat St Link side ae PC side a Device name Points Stat Devicename Points Stat End o a E a 5 Z 2 lt D O er z lees ee O a m e ee B ee masm Ss _____ E Refresh cycle can be set under Link refresh cycle of the Driver setting screen o pa O Default Check Cancel 5 2 POINT oY 1 Set only the link devices used for the personal computer side to th
5. 5 2 Part Names and Settings 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 2 External power supply Display the status of external power supply E PW O OVERVIEW Name Status Description OFF External power supply is not supplied ON External power supply is being supplied E PW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS ol W a O re Ww a 12 2 H W N z lt iy gaz 300 OOF Wu BER Spi ano PARAMETER SETTINGS INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 5 2 Part Names and Settings 5 f 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 5 3 Installation This section explains precautions for handling and installation environment of the CC Link IE Controller Network board 5 3 1 Handling precautions The following explains precautions for handling the CC Link IE Controller Network board Do not touch any connectors while power is on Doing so may cause A WARNING electric shock or malfunction AN CAUTION Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the board Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the board Do not disassemble or modify the board Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Before handling the board touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failur
6. Time ms Displays the time of link refresh Maximum Displays the maximum time of link refresh Minimum Displays the minimum time of link refresh 0 to 99999 1 2 Current Displays the current time of link refresh Displays the test result of the test selected in the mode of Test result i ae Test result the Parameter setting screen Save SB SW Displays the Save SB SW screen Reset Resets the specified board Memory Test Displays the Memory Test screen CF Section 8 3 4 Memory Test screen Closes the Board detail information screen 1 is displayed if the mode is set to Bus I F test 2 is displayed if the time value exceeds over 99999 8 10 8 3 Board Information Screens 8 3 3 Board detail information screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 3 4 Memory Test screen in This screen is displayed by clicking the Memory Test button on the Board detail information screen gt C Section 8 3 3 Board detail information screen This operation diagnoses between CC Link IE Controller Network board and personal computer z fa Z EIPOINT wW 1 Before starting the diagnostic remove the external cables of the target board n2 and set the mode to Offline Bo CF Section 8 4 1 Parameter setting screen 2 To switch the screens during the diagnostic click the Stop button to stop o Zz the diagnostic
7. EIPOINT 1 The link refresh may not be executed in the set cycle because of such factors described below e Performance of the personal computer CPU e Number of set refresh points e Number of installed CC Link IE Controller Network boards e Other running applications e Other running boards 2 If the link refresh time exceeds the link refresh cycle set on the Device setting screen perform any of the following measures e Extend the link refresh cycle Section 8 4 6 Driver setting screen e Decrease the refresh points K5 5 b in this section How to decrease the refresh points 3 The link refresh time may be shortened by upgrading the version of CC IE Control utility or changing assignments of refresh parameters If the shortened link refresh time effects the operation of the applications perform the following measure e Extend the link refresh cycle Section 8 4 6 Driver setting screen 4 3 4 2 Specifications on Cyclic Transmission Processing 4 2 1 Cyclic transmission processing 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC 3 When communication error or communication stop occurs on station When a communication error station or a communication stop station is detected ff during data link other stations hold the data received from the station immediately ee before the error occurrence 35 Communication stop station is a station to which a peripheral device has stopped cyclic tr
8. 14 2 3 When the corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective at installation The following table shows the corrective actions when the screen is displayed 1 Using Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Screen Corrective action User Account Control y J Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before super Unidentified Publisher gt Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for gt Allow Itrust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before This screen is displayed when user account control is enabled Y Details Click Allow or the Yes button User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer User Account Control Program name Setup exe Publisher Unknown File origin Hard drive on this computer ys Jj N Change when these notifications appear Show details Click the Yes button By For safety use of MELSEC Interface Board the power options of ake i 3 MELSECPowerManager is installed and the Windows Power Options settings ES Windows will be changed as follows after installing Invalidating the sleep settings Changing the settings of power button action in shutdown are changed automa
9. 5004 Overlap 8 7 SE i 2 Block 2 Or Unz See 7FFu AGE WZ GE LOO l rmo 6 1FFFu 1FFFu 1FFFH a ee ee ee nee 6 Eo u O zz E awn if 10 8 298 2 dr aes 250 85 6 3 Network Range Assignment Settings 6 13 6 3 2 LX LY settings 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 2 Setting example The following example shows the I O ranges of LX LY for each station when the station number 1 is set as the I O master station in block 1 and 512 points are assigned to station number 2 to 4 LX LY setting 1 1Mp1 1Ns2 Network No 1 1Ns4 1Ns3 6 14 6 3 Network Range Assignment Settings 6 3 2 LX LY settings 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS 6 3 3 MELSEC Total number of link stations 6 3 4 Set the total number of link stations for a single network when CC IE Control Control station or CC IE Control Extended mode Control station is selected in the Network type field Specifying I O master station The I O master station control station which is used for one to one communication by LX LY is specified in units of blocks The I O master station can be set regardless of the station types control station and normal station Each of block 1 and block 2 has one I O master station which is set by the network range assignment of each block Network range assignment a m JLX LY settings x PARAMETER SETTIN
10. Personal computer Installed L r SW1DNC MNETG B Installed CC Link IE Controller Network board Connection Optical fiber cable Connection 2 1 2 1 System Configuration Using CC Link IE Controller Network Board CC Link IE Controller Network 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 2 Single Network System A single network system is a system that connects a control station and normal stations with optical fiber cables A total of 120 stations 1 control station and 119 normal stations can be connected A control station can be any station No s One control station can be connected per network In the system chart below the station No 1 is set as the control station OVERVIEW N 2 2 1 Configuration z fe lt a 9 rs z e iS SYSTEM A configuration example of a single network system is shown below Control station Normal station Normal station Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No n n lt 120 Personal QCPU QJ71 computer GP21 SX QCPU QJ71 GP21 SX SPECIFICATIONS Q80BD J71GP21 SX Power supply Power supply IN Tout IN yout IN OUT FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION PARAMETER SETTINGS INSTALLING AN
11. 8 8 8 3 Board Information Screens 8 3 1 Board list screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 3 2 Channel number confirmation screen This screen is displayed by clicking the Channel confirm button on the board list screen gt start screen gt K Section 8 3 1 Board list screen It is used to check channel numbers displayed in LED display status of the CC Link IE Controller Network board O ra Channel No confirm 3 a LED image 2 5 Board 1 Board 2 Board 3 Board 4 29 Channel No 151 152 153 154 RUN ERR RUN ERR RUN ERR RUN ERR 9 LED n an a SB SD RD SD RD SD RD SD RD lt E E c s s s s 7 W ja n Item Description Display content 2 LED image Displays the channel number and LED display status of the board 5 Channel No Displays the channel number of the installed board 151 to 154 5 Board n Displays the number of boards 1to4 i OFF A RUN Displays RUN LED gt ON green IB OFF Sr ERR Displays ERR LED f ON red ow i OFF z SD Displays SD LED o ON green m OFF RD Displays RD LED ON green ow 25 Close Closes the Channel No confirm screen ot woz 590 RSE The following table shows the LED display of main board corresponds to the channel Cre oO numbers aa Channel No RUN LED ERR LED SD LED RD LED ih 151 O 9 aoa 152 O O ofwy E 153 O O O Sle 3 Sia 154 O O O O 2zZz9
12. Select station network device status display Refer to 4 in this section Communication test Displays Communication test screen lt Section 8 5 2 Communication test screen Link start stop Displays Link start stop screen Section 8 5 3 Link start stop screen Logging Displays logging screen Section 8 5 4 Logging screen Close Closes the CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen 1 Network info display field Displays the link status and station status of the network Board Network No 1 Total No of stations 2 I O master station Block1 0 Block2 0 Link scan time 2ms Network type CC IE Control 1 Connected Present Control Assign Control EZA EZ Item Description Display content Board Displays the board number of the network being diagnosed 1to4 Network No Displays the network number of the network being diagnosed 1 to 239 Displays the total number of the connected stations and reserved Total No of stations i 1 to 120 stations I O master station Displays I O master station number of the network being diagnosed 1 to 120 Link scan time Displays the current link scan time CC IE Control Network type Displays the network type currently set CC IE Control Extended mode Displays the status of each station and between stations con Refer to 2 in this section Prev Use thes
13. ye PROGRAMMING ERROR CODES APPENDICES TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC 5 Setting required stations and contents for different network system configurations The stations and contents of the routing parameter setting for the transient transmission depend on the system configuration a Single network system The routing parameter setting is not required for the transient transmission within the same network Request source C Network No 1 D l Request target b Multiple network system with two networks Set the routing parameters only for the request source station The route to the request target Network No 2 is set for the request source station Request source Relay station C Network No 1 Network No 2 D Request target c Multiple network system with more than two networks In the example below the configuration with four networks is used Set the routing parameters for the request source station and the relay stations The route to the request target Network No 4 is set for the request source station The route to the request target Network No 4 is set for the relay station 1 the one which is the closest to the request source The route to the reques
14. 13 1 1 Error messages displayed on the board information screen 1 Board list screen start screen Error message Only one CC IE Control utility can be started CC IE Control utility has already been started Corrective action The CC IE Control utility has already been activated Execute after completing the activated CC IE Control utility Failed to open the Help file The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B Failed to start up the Device monitor utility The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B Driver is not started Check if the driver is started A CC Link IE Controller Network board is not mounted Mount a board then start utility e Check if the CC Link IE Controller Network board is mounted Start the CC IE Control utility after mounting the CC Link IE Controller Network board Failed to read the version information The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B 2 Channel number confirmation screen Error message Corrective action LED cannot be displayed because of boardXX is bus I F test Please set the mode besides bus F test 3 Board detail information Error message Corrective action It failed in the save of SB SW There is a possibility of failing in the installation Set the mode other than bus I F test The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed
15. Appendix 13 2 Q80BD J71GP21S SX DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY I 174 5 6 87 181 7 13 gt 168 6 61 ry O MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 98 5 3 88 PROGRAMMING ADAM 107 4 21 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS BD808C 317G51 ERROR CODES unit mm inch gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 13 External Dimensions App 50 Appendix 13 2 Q80BD J71GP21S SX APPENDICES MELSEC Appendix 13 3 Q81BD J71GP21 SX 174 5 6 87 gt 181 7 13 168 6 61 J LJ LE m o a a RUN ERR 2 n OO co q ar L OO d Sl TEE i o S o o A AN unit mm inch App 51 Appendix 13 External Dimensions Appendix 13 3 Q81BD J71GP21 SX APPENDICES Appendix 13 4 Q81BD J71GP21S SX x z E w gt SE k 174 5 6 87 He 1 aD KY FS 1 a x 15 z i 181 7 13 j T 168 6 61 AE ooo el o LJ LE F 2 G O a jal q oe oe 9 N i Sa ES OE o EZ Hf E i 18 5 0 73 ERROR CODES unit mm inch gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 13 External Dimensi
16. Start Select Setting Network setting and set the K Section 9 5 Setting a Monitor Target channel to be used Set the device to be monitored Section 9 6 Setting a Device to be Monitored Change the monitoring method device value or i 3 K Section 9 3 Setting the Batch Monitor Function Section 9 4 Setting the 16 point Register Monitor Function Section 9 7 Changing Word Device Double Word Device Values display format as necessary End to Section 9 10 Numerical Pad 9 1 9 1 Overview 9 1 1 List of the functions Q DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEG e 9 2 1 Starting the utility Start the utility by clicking the icon 2 registered in the Start of Windows 1 Start screen All apps or Start All Programs 2 Device monitor utility Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC NETG B Version 1 17T or later d e E z e Ww 2 gt iu a LE i 80 CCIE Control utiity x All programs ty Z _ gt Starts the Device monitor utility lt gt ae Qe Ww co SE 9 2 2 Ending the utility To end the Device monitor utility select Menu Exit 9 Click the Yes button 3 oO Device Monitor Utility is ie Setting Device Write Data F Batch monitor 16 point register monitor o z lt 9 OF ZS a5 tu 9 2 3 Displaying the Help screen N 3 To
17. ol 5 Starting the test Clicking the END button on the Parameter setting screen of the CC IE Control utility displays the following confirmation dialog box W a O re Ww a 12 2 H W N z lt iy gaz 300 OOF Wu One Zua ano CC IE Control utility Writing parameter and reset Board2 Is that OK PARAMETER SETTINGS Clicking the Yes button executes the circuit test INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 5 5 Test 5 23 5 5 4 Circuit test 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 5 24 6 Checking the test result The result is displayed on Test result field of the Board detail information screen lt Normal completion gt Board detail information Board type Q80BDI7IGP21 sX Product information 0312200000000008 Present Error Noer ROM version kf Link refresh Maximum Minimum Current timefms ian ow oo Test result The Circuit test was normally completed Save SB SW Reset Memory Test MELSEC lt Abnormal completion gt Board detail information Board type Q80BDJ71GP21 Sx Product information 0912200000000006 Present Error Noewr ROM version EE E Link refresh Maximum Minimum Current timefms 0 0 0 Test result The Circuit test was abnormally completed Save 5B 5W Reset Memory Test If the test completes abnormally check the error cause on th
18. 2 Without saving the parameter settings set in the CC the Parameter setting screen utility to the personal computer closes Selectable only for boards that are checked in the Board specification field Cannot set the parameter exceeds the number of CC Link IE Controller Network boards installed Invalidated when the system is not logged on as a user having administrator authority When the checked status of Board 1 to 4 under Target board specification is different from the assigned status at the start up of the utility this function cannot be selected and the parameters cannot be set Change the board numbers or parameters to match with the checked status of Board 1 to 4 For changing the board numbers refer to the POINT in this section T The board numbers from 1 to 4 and channel numbers from 151 to 154 are assigned automatically in numeric order of PCI slot number to the CC Link IE Controller Network board installed in the personal computer When the channel number is changed the board number is changed as well corresponding to the changed channel number the next time personal computer is started For assigning the board numbers and channel numbers refer to the following section Section 6 1 Parameter Settings Board Information Settings lt Assigning channel numbers to the CC Link IE Controller Network boards gt lt Assigning board numbers in the CC IE Control utility gt Check the manual of pers
19. be Pubic ber NASIRA CLECE CORPORASEON SS and click the Install button OF a1 Don t Inctail all Always trust softwere from MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Don t Install P i CORPORATION This screen may be displayed a couple of times a5 You should only install driver software from publishers you trust How can I decide which device software is safe to install x os i lt z 16 Bit Application Support S Z mpting to rur SETUP EXE Ww P A 3 lt L When installing Environment of MELSOFT this screen may be ot oe _ Sei Mere aon appar Ye apple petit be displayed Click the Enable button L W Enable Enable 16 bit application support in order to run 16 bit applications Environment of MELSOFT is a 16 bit application 0 D FAENMELENMELENGASETUR DIE 2 tt pion You donot Execute EnvMEL EnvMELENG SETUP EXE in the CD ROM after E permissions with your system administrator 4 w F searching 16 bit Application Support on the control panel and setting to ae Enable The message is displayed when NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 and 3 0 is set to disabled o Inable to install SW1 l B because I ramework 3 psa we Poicdeai A sine wa R 1 t ll th tilit ft hi th T Wi d fi t ff Please install SW1DNC MNETG B again after checking the box on NET einsta e utli y atter searc ing e urn Indows teatures on or O 3 E Framework 3 5 includes NET 2 0 and 3 0 Control P 56 Panel
20. 258 switches set and cancel oe Starts the Equal assignment screen Equallassignment 5 Section 8 4 3 Equal assignment screen z a re 5 c e Ss 8 8 4 Setting Screen 8 15 8 4 2 Network range assignment screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY MELSEC Item Description Default Setting range Starts the Supplementary setting screen Supplementary setting lt Section 8 4 5 Supplementary setting screen Clears the parameter settings of network range cea assignment and sets default settings E 7 Checks for errors in the parameters of the Check network range assignment 7 a Reflects the settings and closes the Network End range assignment screen E E Without reflecting the settings closes the Cancel Network range assignment screen Z 1 Set either Points or Start depending on the assignment method 2 Valid only when LX LY setting 1 or LX LY setting 2 is selected in the Switch screen field 3 Setting ranges of the network range assignment for each device are indicated in the following table Device Item Setting range Points 16 to 32767 multiples of 16 LIB Start 0000 to 7FFO multiples of 16 End OOOF to 7FFF multiples of 16 1 Points 1 to 131072 Lw Start 00000 to 1FFFF End 00000 to 1FFFF Points 16 to 8192 multip
21. 8 40 Displays the time when the transmission path is changed 8 5 Diagnostics Screen 8 5 4 Logging screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY MELS a G Item Description Default Set Display ee Displayed when a transient transmission error Transient transmission error a occurs Error code Displays a transient error code Displays the network number of transient request Target Net 1 to 239 target when the transient error occurred Displays the station number of transient request Target Station 1 to 120 target when the transient error occurred Date Displays the time when the transient error occurred Saves data of the Monitor detail in the CSV file K Appendix 3 3 Error log file Save error log Drive Path Browse K File name Save error log 2 n Cancel e Drive Path specify a save location of the CSV file e File name specify the CSV file name to be saved csv Starts and stops the contents of the Logging screen vay Monitoring executed Stop monitor button is Start monitor 2 3 nee j p l i validated Stop monitor 2 3 aos Monitoring stopped Start monitor button is validated lt lt Error clear gt gt Clears errors Clear Communication Error a Checked Select to clear the c
22. Device name Paints ae End _ Device name _ Points an End p 2 5 z ooo 7FFF e no 00000 8192 0000 LX buffer v 0000 1FFF 8192 0000 LY buffer v 12 aa fe z o m H Refresh cycle can be set under Link refresh cycle of the Driver setting screen O ja Default Check Cancel W Item Description Default Setting range F A r Points Start a Assignment method Select the input method for device ranges Start End Start End 5 Set device ranges to be refreshed 5 m imke Device ranges can be set to Trans 1 to 64 as a group of ink side consecutive devices Make sure that each device range ff does not overlap Device name Set the name of link device to be refreshed LB LW LX LY Sr Points Set the points of link device to be refreshed All ranges of at Ranges shown So Start Set the start of link device to be refreshed LB LW 1 ee lt x End Set the end of link device to be refreshed nineT taole o Displays device ranges to be refreshed on the personal computer PC side Displays settings correspond to the settings of Link side zg Values displayed in Points Start and End are the same gi a as the ones in Link side AGE Displays the device name to be refreshed on the personal Ofn Device name of computer oe WO Point Displays the points of device to be refreshed on the oints personal computer a SEn Displays the start of device to be refreshed on the personal g a computer Z og End Displays th
23. The board may be a failure 258 0102h There is no response from the hardware a Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Remove the boards by the number exceeding the allowable 259 0103n Too many boards were detected number 262 0106n Failed to link the device name Reinstall the OS 264 0108n Failed to register the interrupt Reinstall the OS i Check the personal computer program or programmable An error occurred during the receive j 268 010Cn controller program which requests processing to the rocess p personal computer e Restart the personal computer after installing SW1DNC MNETG B and confirm that no error occurs 979 0117 An error occurred while the registry e Increase the system memory and or disk capacity H database is written When the error has occurred at updating Windows 8 1 or upgrading the operating system with the software package installed reinstall the software package Check the personal computer program or programmable Own station received the request which 280 0118n controller program which requests processing to the was not processable from another station personal computer The I O port is overlapped with that of another resource 282 011An Failed to map the I O port j Remove the other option board Failed to allocate memory area for driver 286 011Ex Increase the memory start Set a parameter with the CC IE Control utility and reset the 287 011FH No param
24. oe re 5 i e Ss o 8 8 3 Board Information Screens 8 3 2 Channel number confirmation screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 3 3 Board detail information screen MELSEC Item Board type This screen is displayed by clicking the Board detail information screen start screen Section 8 3 1 Board list screen It is used to display the detail information on the CC Link IE Controller Network board Board detail information Board type Q80BD71GP21 SX Product information josi220000000000 8 Present Error Noer ROM version DO r Link refresh Maximum Minimum Current timefms 0 0 0 Test result The Self loopback test was normally completed Save SB SW Reset Memory Test Close Description Displays the type of connected CC Link IE Controller Network board button on the board list Display content Q80BD J71GP21 SX Q80BD J71GP21S SX Q81BD J71GP21 SX Q81BD J71GP21S SX 1 Product information Displays the product information serial number and function version of the CC Link IE Controller Network Serial number and function board version Displays the latest error code of the CC Link IE Controller Error code Present error 4 Network board No error RONIVEREION Displays the ROM version of the CC Link IE Controller ROM version Network board Link refresh Displays items related to link refresh
25. QCPUJ 4Ns2 5MP1 Personal computer 1 Request source C Network No 5 D 6 Relay station QCPU 5Ns2 6MpP1 B Network No 6 3 7 Relay station QCPU 7MP1 6Ns2 Network No 7 5 9 Request target 8 Relay station QCPU 9Ns2 QCPU 8Ns4 QCPU 8Mp1 7Ns2 L Network No 9 XC Network No 8 Se SS l QCPU 9Ns3 QCPU 9MP1 8Ns2 A 8Ns3 Personal computer 12 Request target 11 Relay station 10 Request source Ta A a a Setting example A The routing parameter setting is required for the request source 10 10 Request source 11 Relay station 12 Request target h 8Ns3 8Ns2 9MP1 9Ns3 Target network No Relay network No Relay station No 10 Request source 1 9 8 2 1 2 12 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 12 1 2 Routing function 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC b Setting example B The routing parameter setting is required for the request source1 relay station 2 relay station 3 relay station 4 relay station 5 relay station 6 relay station 7 and relay station 8 In addition two types of routing parameters can be set one is for sending data from the request source to the request target when sending a request and the other
26. The following describes precautions when utilizing MELSECNET H parameter settings F Low speed cyclic The CC Link IE Controller Network board does not have this function transmission Assign the low speed cyclic transmission range to the LB LW setting 2 gt The CC Link IE Controller Network board does not have this function PZ f Y The high speed communication can be realized without using the multiplex 2 5 Multiplex transmission A az transmission function on the CC Link IE Controller Network board since aD the link scan time is shorter than that of the MELSECNET H board When a station that is specified as a reserved station exists in the network the transient transmission can be performed to the relevant station N Therefore the following functions can be performed to the relevant station a e Checking the error description with the CC Link IE Controller Network S diagnostics function A Reserved station 4 e Writing parameters from another station when incorrect parameters are specification set e Monitoring other stations using GX Developer 2 e Link dedicated instruction 3 When disconnecting a station that is specified as a reserved station from z all the network set the mode of the relevant station to Offline c For link points per network and link points per station set the link points g Link points within the range of CC Link IE Controller Network board specifications A Sectio
27. Windows 8 e Windows 8 1 2 Behavior when the fast startup function is enabled The following explains the behavior of the board when the fast startup function is enabled e The board is not reconnected even after the fast startup e After the fast startup 28141 9213H System sleep error occurs when accessing CC Link IE Controller Network board from the CC IE Control utility or an application program which includes MELSEC data link library function 3 Corrective action When the fast startup function is enabled on the personal computer the setting is changed by MELSECPowerManager For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to the following section K Appendix 11 Appendix 10 3 Behavior when the fast startup function is enabled APPENDICES Appendix 11 MELSECPowerManager aN F For safety use of MELSEC Interface Board the power options of f re safety use es MTER Board the power options of QO Windows were changed as follows Invalidating the sleep settings Invalidating the sleep settings MELSECPowerManager is a service application which monitors the Windows Power Options settings every 30 seconds to prevent the personal computer from entering the power save mode hibernate sleep or fast startup MELSECPowerManager is applicable for the following operating systems e Windows Vista e Windows Server 2008 e Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 e Windows Server 2012 e Windows
28. 2 H W N z lt iy gaz 300 n0 W OES Zua ano 3 Power ON Power ON the personal computer Power ON the module i oO 4 Test mode settings He a Setting the executing station Ze Set as follows on the Parameter setting screen of the CC IE Control utility o Network type CC IE Control Control station 7 Mode Test between station Station No Station number for the executing station z og Onw Operational setting EzE 253 Network type CCIE Control Control station Model Test between station seting Network No 1 Group No 0 Station No 1 B 85 5 5 Test 5 25 5 5 5 Station to station test 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC b Setting the target station In the network parameter of GX Works2 set the mode to Online 4 Ifthe CC Link IE Controller Network board is the target station set as follows on the Parameter setting screen of the CC IE Control utility Network type CC IE Control Normal station Mode Online Station No Station number for the target station 5 Starting the test Clicking the END button on the Parameter setting screen of the CC IE Control utility displays the following confirmation dialog box CC IE Control utility A Writing parameter and reset Board2 Is that OK Clicking the Yes button executes the station to station test 6 Checking the test result The result is displayed on
29. 5 c e Ss o 8 Q DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY CHAPTER 9 DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY This chapter explains the operating and setting method for the Device monitor utility For accessible devices refer to the MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 9 1 Overview This function sets devices to be monitored and changes device values 9 1 1 List of the functions The following explains the functions of the Device monitor utility Function Description Reference Batch monitor Batch monitors one type of devices Section 9 3 l 3 Monitors multiple devices simultaneously in units of 16 16 point register monitor Section 9 4 points 3 Set the programmable controller CPU or CC Link IE f Setting a monitor target Section 9 5 Controller Network board to be monitored Setting monitor devices Set devices to be monitored Section 9 6 Data changing Changes word device double word device values Changes sequenced word devices double word Section 9 7 Continuous Change in Data devices to a same value Turning bit devices ON and OFF Turns bit devices ON and OFF Section 9 8 Changes a display format such as in hexadecimal or Changing a display format Section 9 9 in decimal of a device monitor Numerical pad Input numerical values with the numerical pad Section 9 10 9 2 Operating Procedure This section explains the operating procedure for the Device monitor utility
30. After formatting the HD install the operating OR Does the board operate on other personal He system again T computer i Sei e Repair or replace the personal computer If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to Section 14 9 7 g 14 7 2 Driver WDT error Z When the driver WDT error occurred check the following items F Item Corrective action Has the error occurred due to the system e Reset the board lt Section 8 3 3 overload temporarily e Restart the personal computer o A e Remove the factor of system overload lt 2 Is the same error occurred repeatedly 55 e Disable the driver WDT function or increase the az Is the system overloaded constantly T driver WDT monitoring time Section 8 4 6 A driver WDT error may occur when the system is overloaded temporarily due to the following factors Windows start processing at the personal computer startup e Operation of a device driver such as a graphic board e Operation of other software applications If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to K Section 14 9 LGOTA lene cee Y ERROR CODES APPENDICES INDEX 14 7 Actions for WDT Error 1 4 29 14 7 1 Board WDT error 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 8 Measures for Slow Personal Computer Operation This section explains the probable causes and corrective measures when the operation of a personal computer becomes slow 1 Probable causes
31. External power supply ON 8 Personal computer power OFF 2 Ponte OFF OFF paca Error Error Normal a External power supply OFF occurred amp INDEX Appendix 2 Network Status at Power ON OFF and Board Reset During Data Linking App 12 Appendix 2 1 Network status at power ON OFF APPENDICES c When the personal computer is restarted Restarting Windows Communication Data link status of own station Data link status other than own External Personal Loop Time frame power computer br status baton cyclic station cyclic supply power gratus pass status transmission transmission status status 8 Personal computer shut down Driver completion Driver completion gg Before personal computer ON ON Normal Normal Normal Normal restart Personal computer restart 10 Before CC Link IE Controller Network board driver start up CC Link IE Controller Network 7 Gj 11 ad ON ON Normal Normal Normal Normal board driver in operation After CC Link IE Controller 12 A ON ON Normal Normal Normal Normal Network board driver start up d When the system is shut down Powering ON again after powering OFF the personal computer Data link status other than own station cyclic transmission Data link status of own station cyclic transmission Communication status baton pass status Personal computer power External power sup
32. KO 25 Z l B aL Y PAN 317651 5 4 5 2 Part Names and Settings 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION No Name Description Indicates the operating status of the CC Link IE Controller Network board ff 1 Indicator LED re lt gt 1 in this section i Connector for connecting optical fiber cable The cable terminal is as shown below Z IN Reverse loop transmission O Ke IN F dl ti 2 Optical fiber cable a a o connector 6 OUT Forward loop transmission nO OUT Reverse loop reception Yn 6 For wiring of an optical fiber cable refer to the following section E F Section 5 4 Wiring 2 3 External power supply Indicates the status of external power supply g LED I 2 in this section 2 Connector for connecting external power supply cable The cable terminal is as shown below ep ee Zz O External power suppl I S 4 y Board top L5 2 cable connector Eft toa fi 24G 5 a o T a EPW win O L DV m fako nz oF Ww aN z O q i4 WW Q e PARAMETER SETTINGS INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 5 2 Part Names and Settings 5 5 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 1 Indicator LED Display the operati
33. ZE lt O 7 5 nk Cable disconnection P s Wins 2300 Communication status Zs Communication error other than cable disconnection coh ie Okui ano Module error CC Link IE Controller Network parameter setting error or transient transmission error ae g 9 Displayed at faulty parts Modul Error details buttons Eer ics 3 i Such as the __Neduleeror Zoe Refer to 6 in this section button ofa z 2359 e fo S oO iS 8 5 Diagnostics Screen 8 33 8 5 1 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 5 Select station network device status LED display For modules Displays the LED status on the top part of the CC Link IE Controller Network module and CC Link IE Controller Network board according to the device status in the Select station network device status display field For boards Name LED status For modules KIRLE E ON green Operating normally Operating normally RUN WDT error occurred or board OFF Hardware error or watchdog timer error resetting ON green Online mode Flashing MODE Test mode green OFF Offline mode SD ON green Sending data Sending data OFF Not sending data Not sending data e Received data is a fault Receive frame error A frame error over the certain level occurred in between stations e Control stations or station numbers are ove
34. cee 6 18 6 4 Equal Assignment Settings 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 3 Assigning identical points of 128 to the LB LW send ranges for each station gt ae gt Equal assignment td Select Identical point 2 Identical point assignment 128 Points assignment and enter 128 Equal assignment LB LW settings 1 LB equal assignment LW equal assignment 5 Start station Station Start station End station Station End station a Start No Start No 3 Total points assigned Total points assigned F gt O nO Identical points are assigned in the LB LW setting 1 field of the Network range assignment screen Network range assignment wn Kester E Total stations 4 xf C Points Stat Start End Fan re 1 E F TBAW seting iB tw Points Stat End Points Stat End Points Start End oO i 128 ooo o07F o000 0007F wu 2 128 0080 ooFF 00060 OO0FF oe 3 128 o100 _017F 0700 _0077F oO 4128 oreo onFF 0180 _oo1FF Specify reserved station J Supplementary seting Clear za O O T 4 Assigning identical points of 128 to the LX LY send ranges for each station ow raa TO Qui Equal assignment E3 Select Identical point ie o gt n 290 Identical point assignment 128 Points Cancel assignment and enter RES 128 C Equal assignment Fe LX LY settings 1
35. e 70 25 30 period 50 60Hz 1 The tests were conducted installed in a control panel Appendix 12 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE App 46 Appendix 12 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK APPLICATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING LIBRARY ERROR CODES gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES 2 Installing devices in the control panel Installing devices in the control panel has a considerable effect not only securing safety but also shielding the noise generated from the personal computer in the control panel a Control panel e Use a conductive control panel e Mask off the area used for grounding when securing the top or bottom plate to the control panel using bolts e To ensure electrical contact between the inner plate and the control panel mask off the bolt installation areas of an inner plate so that conductivity can be ensured in the largest possible area e Ground the control panel with a thick ground cable so that low impedance can be ensured even at high frequencies e Keep the diameter of the holes on the control panel to 10cm or less If the diameter is larger than 10cm electromagnetic wave may be emitted In addition because electromagnetic wave leaks through a clearance between the control panel and its door reduce the clearance as much as possible Use of EMI gaskets sealing the clearance can suppress undesired radiat
36. 1 j 1 1 1 ji 1 1 f 1 1 PARAMETER SETTINGS K 1 program We Controller Network data storage i storage i 1 driver buffer Link area area 1 Link 1 1 1 refresh 1 refresh i 1 1 1 4 If the CC Link IE Controller Network board is a control station configure settings on the Network range assignment screen of the CC IE Control utility 2 Configure settings of refresh ranges on the Refresh parameter setting screen of the CC IE Control utility INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 4 2 Specifications on Cyclic Transmission Processing 4 2 4 2 1 Cyclic transmission processing 4 FUNCTIONS 2 Link scan and link refresh Link scan is executed asynchronously with the link refresh which is executed by the CC Link IE Controller Network board driver Link refresh is executed at the interval of time set for Link refresh cycle on the Driver setting screen of the CC IE Control utility K5 Section 8 4 6 Driver setting screen Link refresh time can be checked on the Board detail information screen KF Section 8 3 3 Board detail information screen Link refresh cycle Set time Set time Set time Set time Link refresh Link refresh Link refresh Link scan H
37. 9 MELSEC data link library Chapter 10 Chapter 10 gives overview of the MELSEC data link library 10 Interlock related signals Chapter 11 Chapter 11 explains the interlock related signals 11 Application functions Chapter 12 Chapter 12 explains application functions of the CC Link IE Controller Network board 12 Error codes Chapter 13 Chapter 13 describes the error codes 13 Troubleshooting Chapter 14 Chapter 14 provides information on troubleshooting A 21 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Generic Term Abbreviation Q80BD J71GP21 SX Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the CC Link IE Controller Network interface board Description Abbreviation for Q80BD J71GP21 SX CC Link IE Controller Network interface board Q80BD J71GP21S SX Abbreviation for Q80BD J71GP21S SX CC Link IE Controller Network interface board Q81BD J71GP21 SX Abbreviation for Q81BD J71GP21 SX CC Link IE Controller Network interface board Q81BD J71GP21S SX Abbreviation for Q81BD J71GP21S SX CC Link IE Controller Network interface board CC Link IE Controller Network board Generic term for Q80BD J71GP21 SX Q80BD J71GP21S SX Q81BD J71GP21 SxX Q81BD J71GP21S SX CC Link IE Controller Network interface board CC Link IE Controller Network board with external power supply function Generic term for Q830BD J71GP21S SX Q81BD J71GP21S SX CC Link IE Contr
38. CC IE Control utility CF Section 8 4 4 Routing parameter setting screen Routing parameter setting FR ees ees ee No No No Maximum size of transient transmission when relaying other networks Channel No 151 960 Words 480 Words Channel No 152 960 Words 480 Words Channel No 153 S60 Words 480 Words Channel No 154 960 Words 480 Words 960 words setting can be set when the relay station and target station of transient transmission which relayed other network No are the MELSEC Q series modules Clear Check C ea Cancel Es POINT For details of the routing function refer to the following section Section 12 1 2 Routing function 6 20 6 5 Routing Parameter Settings 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 6 6 Supplementary Settings if The supplementary settings are included in the Network range assignment setting and it gt is used to set more detailed settings 5 Use the initial settings in general The supplementary settings parameter settings are required only for the control station The parameters are sent from the control station to normal stations at start up of the network 2 The supplementary settings are set on the Supplementary setting screen in the CC IE 5 Control utility Ei CF Section 8 4 5 Supplementary setting screen 58 Supplementary setting wn Zz Constant scan 500 ms E Block data assurance per station D D Transient setting V Punctualit
39. HEX hexadecimal 32 bits OCT octal 32 bits BIN binary 32 bits O O CO OC O Can be displayed Cannot be displayed 3 Double word devices Display format Batch monitor 16 point register monitor DEC decimal signed 32 bits O O DEC decimal unsigned 32 bits O O HEX hexadecimal 32 bits O O OCT octal 32 bits O O BIN binary 32 bits O O Can be displayed Cannot be displayed 4 Bit devices Display format Batch monitor 16 point register monitor Vertical Indication Horizon Indication F 0 O decimal E Horizon Indication F 0 O hexadecimal Horizon Indication 0 F decimal i gt Horizon Indication 0 F O hexadecimal O Can be displayed Cannot be displayed 9 11 9 9 Switching a Display Format Q DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEG e 9 10 Numerical Pad A numerical pad can be used for setting device values and other numeric parameters by selecting Option Numerical Pad d e E z e Ww 2 gt iu a 1 Click the numeric value input field xe z Data Changing z a Device W 0001 Qe ira HEX DEC o R 4 25 Z g 2 The numerical pad is displayed Use the buttons to input a desired value and then click the OK button Numerical Pad x Zo EZ q0 OF 20 ag Back Clear a5 tu ee ER a io 5
40. MELSEC Determination method Action When the utility is activated and if the following User Account Control screen is displayed requesting a selection of user with administration authority and password entry the user who is logging on to the system does not have an administrator authority Log off the system and login again as a user with administrators authority and activate the utility 2 System standby error or system hibernation error is displayed System Standby Failed The power save mode stand by hibernate is not supported for CC Link IE Controller Network board Configure the settings of the Power Options in the control panel to avoid the computer 11 ae ea oer A Le aati Se OTL E E Gh ne S EEN standby Please close all applications and try from activating the power save mo de stan d by hibernate Check the setting for when the computer s power button is pressed and the settings of the uninterruptible power supply system UPS CPU modules other than QCPU Q mode cannot be accessed to the 64 bit version of 12 CPU modules other than QCPU cannot be accessed ee user application Use 32 bit version of user application When the operation settings of two or more Any of the following errors occurred at the completion of the parameter i tti boards are changed at the same time an setting 9 error of duplicated station number or e Duplication of station No and contr
41. Network No Displays the network number of the selected network own station 1 to 239 Group No Displays the group number of the selected network own station 0 to 32 Station No Displays the station number of the selected network own station 1 to 120 F Displays the information of each station connected to the selected All station status network own station Selected Selective status Displays the status selected as a target of the link start stop Not selected 1 to 120 Station No 2 Displays the station number in the specified network Linking blue 8 38 8 5 Diagnostics Screen 8 5 3 Link start stop screen Link status Displays the link status in the specified network Stopping red Displays the group number to which stations in the specified network Group 0 to 32 belongs Control Station Type Displays the station type in the specified network Normal Station 8 CC IE Control UTILITY MELSEC Item Description Default Setting range Link start stop Specifies link start and stop z ON z Link start Select to execute link start to the selected station ON OFF ui fe ON Link stop Select to execute link stop to the selected station OFF OFF 3 Select to execute forced link start to the selected ON Zz Force link start OFF station OFF z An operation selected for Link start stop is executed g Execute
42. Play CDs or other media automatically Opeenes diyi Ww Printer Mouse Fa Additional Options Fra Programs KE Grn progam T Change startup programs Mobile PC D ea gs 4 To the next page APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 9 Warning Message Appears on Windows App 32 Appendix 9 2 Methods for preventing the warning message APPENDICES rs CELSE From the previous page 3 Select User Accounts Change your Windows password Windows CardSpace Manage Information Cards that are used to lag on to online services 4 4 Select Turn User Account Control on or off cag EEPE T Use FSET User cco f s f search P ie Make changes to your user account Lee ers Lum User Account Control on or off 4 5 Deselect Turn on User Account Control UAC to make gt RRS User Accounts gt Turn User Account Control On or Off 4s Search P y g your computer more secure and click the button Turn on User Account Control UAC to make your computer more secure User Account Control UAC can help prevent unauthorized changes to your computer We recommend that you leave UAC turned on to help protect your computer Use User Account Control UAC to help protect your computer 4 Setting completion App 33 Appendix 9 Warning Message Appears on Windows Appendix 9 2 Methods for preventing the warning message APPEND
43. Standby system Control system Connection to the control system Personal computer LE Tracking cable CC Link IE Controller EF Network board CC Link IE Controller Network module MELSECNET H module MELSECNET H CC Link IE Controller Network C 5 Control system Standby system Connection to the control system p Personal computer Tracking cable CC Link IE Controller EE EER Network board Figure 2 Path switching example 2 x POINT e Path switching is not executed when a communication to the Redundant CPU specified at Logical station No is faulty at communication start A communication error occurs When a communication is faulty refer to 4 b Checking method of path switching occurrence and access examples of path switching in this section and clear the communication disturbance 1 First communication after execution of the mdOpen function in the MELSEC data link library communications using the mdReceiveEx mdSendEx mdDevRstEx mdDevSetEx mdRandREx mdRandWEx mdReceive mdSend mdControl mdDevRst MdDevSet mdRandR mdRandW or mdTypeRead function e If other station access including the programmable controller CPU other than the Redundant CPU is
44. b Block data assurance per station Set whether to guarantee cyclic data in station units When the Block data assurance per station is available checkbox is checked link refresh is performed handshaking between the personal computer and the CC Link IE Controller Network board c Punctuality is guaranteed When the Punctuality is guaranteed checkbox is checked each station executes the transient transmission for the number of times specified in Maximum No of transients in one station which keeps the link scan time constant d Maximum No of transients in one station Set the number of transient transmissions that one station can be executed in one link scan Change the number of transient transmissions executed in one link scan as necessary See POINT below Setting value TO Initial value Setting range Setting item Constant scan None 1 to 500 ms Block data assurance per station Checked Checked Unchecked Punctuality is guaranteed Checked Checked Unchecked Transient transmission Maximum No of transients 2 1 to 10 in one station IPOINT 1 By increasing the number of transients multiple transient instructions can be executed at the same time in one link scan 2 If the number of transients is increased and the transient request was issued in each station at the same time the link scan time becomes temporarily longer and the cyclic transmission is also affected Do not set unnecessaril
45. class IEC 60825 1 of these laser diodes is Class 1 Do not look directly at laser light Doing so may harm your eyes CAUTION Do not install the external power supply or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm 3 94 in or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Installation Precautions N WARNING Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before installing the board to or removing it from the personal computer Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the board to fail or malfunction Do not touch any connectors while power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunction CAUTION Use the board in an environment that meets the general specifications in this manual Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the board Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the board When installing the board take care not to get injured by an implemented component or a surrounding member Fix the board by tighten the board fixing screws within the specified torque range Undertightening may cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening may damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short
46. e 5 me O W ja Memory Test m Diagnosis Address Count Port Memory FCFFE000 lt gt FD1FDFFFH 0 2 O Z ra gt e 5 Oa Close a S O W gt Item Description Displays the address being diagnosed the number of times and the status of the eM Diagnosis F Pie diagnostics On vaz Start Starts the memory diagnostics AGE wz Ofer Stop Stops the memory diagnostics Okui ano if 0 a 293 2 a rd TAL 253 oe 5 i e Ss o 8 8 3 Board Information Screens 8 11 8 3 4 Memory Test screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 4 Setting Screen This section explains about the screens which are used to set parameters of the CC Link IE Controller Network board 8 4 1 Parameter setting screen This screen is displayed by clicking the button on the board list screen start screen lt Section 8 3 1 Board list screen Parameter setting Target board specification Boad1 M Boad2 M Boad3 M Board4 Routing parameter Board 1 x Channel No 151 x Operational setting Network type CCIE Control Control station v Mode Online fd Network No 1 3 Group No 0 Station No 1 4 Network range assignment Driver setting Event setting Target setting Refresh parameter Check Default Load file Save file Verify Cancel Item Description Default Setting range x Unchecked Target board specification Select board s for parameter settings U
47. lt crcrt terete nner ees Tq 7 2 installationen nenene E E E E EENS 7 2 73 Unnstalaton eee ee e EEEE E E EEE E EE EEEE E R 7 5 CHAPTER 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 1to8 41 8 1 OveryjeW hittin renee ence nner ene tseese anne nee n se ssseseaa nn eneneseseessean renner es 8 1 8 1 1 List Of FUNCTIONS orice ttt ne en eens ener enn e nse esensenan nnn enseesenees 8 2 8 2 Operating Procedure EE E ELEL ET TTET EET T EET ELE E ETET EET 8 3 8 2 1 Starting the utility eee eetere eer etter ete e eters treet etree treet ste eetteeettteeetneeees 8 4 8 2 2 Ending the utility Pertrrie rere Cc cre rrr RAAE eer eter cee Tere corer Te Teer ere cece ere eer Tee ceri 8 5 8 2 3 Displaying MANUal torre ene ene nner enter eneea anne eens eee esennennn eres 8 5 8 2 4 Checking the version information cctctt ttt ttt nnn n ee et nne nese nnnnnes 8 6 8 3 Board Information Screens eas at lang la na apa la aah ao ee tng Ta Nava Wan tae marin ama E 8 a7 8 3 1 Board list screen iit rt crt nner ent enee enn n nnn e nnn tesenn rane erseesenaes 8 7 8 3 2 Channel number confirmation screen ccc tt ttt t cnet nee enee nines 8 9 8 3 3 Board detail information screen ss sitet tte e eee e enna nee e eres eeennes 8 10 8 3 4 Memory Test SCEN ee cre 8 11 8 4 Setting Sereen e eeeeeteeeteeteteteteetettrttetieettrettnttitnttttttentttnttittttnttttttttnetettttnettnetetntttetttt 8 12 8 4 1 Parameter setting SCEN eee nee 8 12 8 4 2 Network range assignment SCIERN rrr ent t ener tneenennn ne ne
48. screen Eveni seting KC Section 8 4 7 Event setting screen a 25 Displays the Target setting screen z z largenseting K Section 8 4 8 Target setting screen E 39 Displays the Refresh parameter setting screen Retesh parameter LE Section 8 4 9 Refresh parameter setting screen 7 7 Pa Checks for incorrect settings in all parameters of the 25 Check target board E E oul Sets default in all parameter settings of the target ase Default ofr board Okui Reads parameter settings saved in the file to the CC noo Load file IE Control utility K Appendix 3 1 Parameter file i Saves parameter settings set in the CC IE Control 2 oS Save file utility in a file 9 u gt Appendix 3 1 Parameter file z 5 z Verifies the parameters written to personal Zz9 computer and the parameters of the CC IE Control 8 utility Keni When the verification result is a mismatch saves E E the verification result to a text file Appendix 3 4 Verification result file re 5 c e 8 o 8 8 13 8 4 Setting Screen 8 4 1 Parameter setting screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY Item End 2 3 4 CC Link Saves the parameter settings set in the CC IE Control utility to the personal computer resets the the Parameter setting screen MELSEC Description Default Setting range E Controller Network board and closes Cancel 8 14 IE Contro 4 2 3 A 4 POIN 1
49. wa M station gt L station equal assignment M station lt L station equal assignment ano Start station Station Start station Station End station Station End station Station Start No Start No Total paints assigned a Total points assigned ez Identical points are assigned in the LX LY setting 1 field of the Network range assignment screen fr MEO 2 par awn Network range assignment Network range assignment Assignment method Monitoring time 200 me Total stations 4 z C Points Stat Start End anae MEE M station lt L station l X Ly aan End Points Sten End S 128 0080 corr m28 0080 00FF Q 6 128 oo o17F 128 oof ovr Zoe 128 sol _mFF 0180 OFF z S E Zdr ERE 20E Do 2210 Specify 1 0 master station Specify reserved station F Supplementary setting Clear Check End Cancel c O ae 25 QE o gt 6 4 Equal Assignment Settings 6 19 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 6 5 Routing Parameter Settings The transmission target and relay stations of the transient transmission are set in the routing parameter settings CC Link IE Controller Network boards cannot be used as relay stations For relay stations set the network modules controlled by the programmable controller CPU The routing parameter settings are set on the Routing parameter setting screen in the
50. 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 4 ii Sie aes ovina dachca Sag asidaidathdn aig Mdahdvded tal eahe Ante dan Manag elaas dundaassbiwteldadd eu hataenadias 1 1 To atin areren tars ans ERTA NR RETER EREINA arena Gata es ero aoe eee 1 2 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1to2 11 2 1 System Configuration Using CC Link IE Controller Network Board sstrtrtttrttttttttttttt 2 1 2 2 Single Network System lt ete eisiiiieiiiroids instasiir ie iite aiaiai ta eniai ian 2 2 2 2 1 Configuration eieiei iiinis iniiis ises vsins sansene a ietudes steeen eiineasi seene v isni 2 2 2 2 2 Setting toms eetere nenten nenene ennenen nieren teei 2 3 2 2 3 Available device ranges lt tese cere ete teeters eee es eee ete e eee ee cece ene cnecteeee eee eeeeteeeee seats 2 3 2 3 Multi Network System ees stera teiis ienaa ei cece ene seeeneecateee cece heanin aana dennaii E 2 4 2 3 1 Configuratori eip E Eren anina aia aE En p SEEE ERER anA A Ei E RENA a EREET En 2 4 2 3 2 Setting items ce cece erste tet ee eee ete eects cte cence eee ete eee tees cece insest diiinte iduri aunit 2 5 2 3 3 Available device range lt ste cere ete crete tree teen ee eneene ene ce cece ce cteeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeey 225 2 4 Use in Multiple CPU System or Redundant CPU System 1 recreereetteteteeeeeeeettet teeter eneeees 2 6 2 5 Operating Environment en inertes enient eneeier entertainen tentene entana 2 7 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1to3 3 3 1 General Specifications 1111s etter ecen r
51. 2 5 Section 5 1 5 5 Section 6 7 Section 7 1 7 3 Section 8 2 Section 8 2 1 Section 8 2 4 Section 8 3 1 Section 8 4 6 Section 9 2 1 Section 9 2 3 CHAPTER 10 Section 12 1 4 Section 13 1 2 CHAPTER 14 Section 14 1 Section 14 2 3 Section 14 3 Section 14 3 2 Section 14 6 Section 14 9 Appendix 5 Appendix 9 1 Appendix 9 2 Appendix 10 Appendix 10 1 Appendix 10 2 Appendix 11 Appendix 11 2 Appendix 11 3 Section 5 2 is changed to Section 5 3 Section 5 6 1 and 5 6 2 are changed to Section 5 5 4 and 5 5 5 Section 5 7 1 is changed to Section 5 5 6 Section 7 1 1 is changed to Section 7 2 Section 7 1 3 is changed to Section 14 2 3 Appendix 4 is changed to Appendix 7 Appendix 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 and 12 are changed to Appendix 4 5 6 9 12 13 10 and 11 Deletion Section 5 6 Section 5 7 Section 7 1 2 Section 10 1 Section 10 2 Section 14 5 4 Correction Section 2 5 Section 7 1 Section 7 2 Section 8 2 1 Section 8 4 1 Section 9 1 1 Section 9 2 Section 9 3 Section 9 4 Section 9 6 Section 9 7 Section 9 9 Section 12 1 Section 14 1 Section 14 2 2 Section 14 2 3 Section 14 3 2 Appendix 3 1 Appendix 7 2 Appendix 9 2 Appendix 10 2 Appendix 10 3 Appendix 11 Section 9 9 to Section 9 11 are changed to Section 9 8 to Section 9 10 Deletion Section 9 8 Correction Section 3 2 Section 8 3 4 Apr 2015 SH NA 080691ENG S Correction Sect
52. 20000 54 PM Shortcut E Windows Memory Diagnostic 73 2009 953M Shortcut Windows PowerShell Modules 7A3 20091032PM Shortcut Ea 2008 x64 en F a 2008R2 64 jp G L To the next page App 43 Appendix 11 MELSECPowerManager Appendix 11 3 Checking MELSECPowerManager 1 Open Control Panel System and Security APPENDICES Ts EL SEC File Action View Hep From the previous page 4 e AMonelHm gt any 1G Services Local bended Standard Setting completion IPOINT x O E 4 Check if MELSECPowerManager is registered 6 OF g Ge ay xe z lt x z oe O W a8 W Q So oO Z Z e When MELSECPowerManager is disabled the personal computer may g enter the power save mode hibernate sleep automatically depending g on the settings on the personal computer Do not disable MELSECPowerManager because the CC Link IE Controller Network board does not function normally if the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep For the behavior of the board when Za the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep or Fae the fast startup function is enabled refer to the following appendix 59 K5 Appendix 10 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save lt i Mode or Fast Startup If MELSECPowerManager is disabled accidentally right click MELSECPowerManager on the Services Local screen and select Start from the men
53. 3 Section 10 2 1 Section 10 2 3 Chapter 15 Section 16 2 Section 16 3 1 Appendix 4 Section 8 1 2 changed to Section 8 1 3 MELSECNET G network system controller network is changed to CC Link IE Controller Network Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS FOR USE INTRODUCTION CONTENTS MANUAL HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS PACKING LIST CHAPTER 1 Section 1 1 Section 1 2 Section 1 3 Section 2 1 Section 2 2 2 Section 2 2 3 Section 2 3 Section 2 3 2 Section 2 4 Section 2 5 Section 2 6 CHAPTER 3 Section 3 1 Section 3 2 CHAPTER 4 Section 4 1 Section4 2 Section 4 2 1 Section 5 1 CHAPTER 6 Section 6 1 Section 6 2 Section 6 2 1 Section 6 2 2 Section 6 3 Section 6 4 Section 6 4 1 Section 6 5 Section 6 5 1 Section 6 5 2 Section 6 5 3 Section 6 6 Section 6 6 1 Section 6 6 2 CHAPTER 7 Section 7 1 Section 7 2 Section 7 3 Section 7 3 3 Section 7 4 Section 7 5 Section 7 6 Section 7 7 Section 7 8 Section 7 9 Section 8 1 Section 8 1 1 Section 8 1 2 Section 8 1 3 Section 8 2 CHAPTER 9 Section 9 1 Section 9 1 1 Section 9 2 Section 9 2 1 Section 9 2 2 Section 9 2 3 Section 9 2 4 Section 9 3 Section 9 3 1 Section 9 3 2 Section9 3 3 Section 9 4 Section 9 4 1 Section 9 4 6 Section 9 4 7 Section 9 4 8 Section 9 5 1 Section 9 5 3 Section 9 5 4 Section 10 1 1 Section 10 2 1 Section 10 3 Section 10 4 Section 10 5 CHAPTER 11 Section 11 1 S
54. 63 es The device No is outside the range Set the values for the device number within the following ae a Please input each device within the following ranges ranges to each device specified by device codes LB 0000 7FFF LB 0000 7FFF LW 0000 1F FFF LW 0000 1F FFF 2 LX 0000 1FFF LX 0000 1F FF SB 0000 01FF SB 0000 01FF D 2 we SW 0000 01FF SW 0000 01FF Ds 5 a a a W ao The device size is outside the range i So i f a Set the value for the device size within the range of 1 to 64 Please input it on the following conditions wk j and device No device size 1 should not exceed the Input within the range of 1 64 device No device size 1 maximum value of the device number must not exceed the upper bound of device No g The word device is outside the range Set the value for the word device within the range of 1 to 2 Please input a value within the range 1 65535 65535 Rs The event No XX is overlapping Please correct the 2 Set the event numbers not to overlap a settings 8 Target setting screen Error message Corrective action ba The logical station number setting value is outside the z range Set the value for the logical station within the range of 0 to 239 Ze i Please input a value within the range 0 239 SE The network No setting value is outside the range Set the value for the network number within the range of 1 to 1 3 Please input the value within the range 1 239 239 The station number se
55. CC IE Control utility Link IE Ne D z Select tain I Change select staon nO Naka CE Cael No of stations 2 I O aaa E Link scan time 2ms wn Zz O S L O W Click fore Ne atom conestn Staton nap ik CCIE ca Connected station giri a Zz O 2 5 ol 2 The Communication test screen is displayed Communication Test Communication test details 1 Destination 2 Communication data Network No Length Station No Communication count W a O re Ww a 12 o H W N z lt iy gaz 300 OOF Wu One wa ano W D T Communication test result PARAMETER SETTINGS INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 5 5 Test 5 27 5 5 6 Communication test 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC Execute test button to execute 3 Set the items shown below and click the the communication test lt Section 8 5 2 Communication test screen Communication Test r Communication test details 1 Destination Network No 100 Byte 1 Count 5 Second C Length Communication count W D T Station No Click Setting items 4 When the communication test is completed a communication test result is displayed If an error occurs perform the measure by following the error message Communication Test p Communication test details 1 Destination 2 Communication data Net
56. IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen 14 5 Flowchart for Error during Data Link 1 4 27 14 5 3 Flowchart when communications are occasionally disabled during user program execution DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FUNCTIONS LGOTA ONE Y ERROR CODES APPENDICES INDEX 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG 14 6 When External Power Supply Function did not Correctly Operate When the external power supply does not operate properly check the following items Item Corrective action e Review the wiring of the external power supply Is the LED of external power supply OFF cable Inset the connectors and contacts until they click Section 5 5 2 e Set the voltage between the pins of the connector Is the voltage output to the connector of the cable side is within the range of the specification external power supply cable F Section 3 2 e Check the external power supply If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to Section 14 9 1 4 28 14 6 When External Power Supply Function did not Correctly Operate 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 7 Actions for WDT Error x z g 14 7 1 Board WDT error W gt he a When the board WDT error occurred check the following items Item Corrective action ai lt Is the board installed properly e Check the board installation status lt
57. Network board Control station Normal station Network board 2 Status Displays communication status of the CC Link IE Controller Network board Start data linking Stop data linking Relay of data packet No relay of data packet Executing Offline test Offline Board detail information Starts the Board detail information screen Start monitor Starts monitoring Valid when monitoring is stopped Stop monitor Stops monitoring Valid when monitoring Channel confirm Starts the Channel No confirm screen Starts the CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen Leone i I Section 8 5 1 CC Link IE Controller Network T diagnostics result screen Starts the Parameter setting screen Setting CF Section 8 4 1 Parameter setting screen Manual Displays this manual Close End the CC IE Control utility 4 Functions for the system menu are described below 2 For the assignment of Board 1 to 4 refer to Section 6 1 3 is displayed if the mode is set to Bus I F test Move Moves the board list screen Minimize Minimizes the board list screen Close Closes the board list screen Device monitor utility Starts the Device monitor utility Version information Displays the version information of the CC IE Control utility Manual Displays this manual
58. No Routing parameter setting Target Relay Relay The setting is required it Network No Network No Station No only for the Target Network No 3 S 3 1 4 Q 1MP1 1Ns2 1Ns3 3Me1 3Ns2 a Network No 1 D Network No 3 E N W 1Ns6 1Ns5 1Ns4 2Mp1 2Ns4 3Ns5 3Ns4 3MP3 nz ke Request target C Network No 2 DAN Routing parameter setting 2Ns2 2Ns3 Routing parameter setting Target Relay Relay Target Relay Relay iB Network No Network No Station No Network No Network No Station No ray Zz 2 C Stations that the e 1 a routing parameter lt setting is required A Q zZ 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 1 2 f 12 1 2 Routing function 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 4 Routing parameter setting a Setting screen Up to 64 Target Network No can be set on the Routing Parameter Setting screen of the CC IE Control utility The same target network number cannot be set more than one multiple For this reason the own station may become a request source and up to 64 types of Target Network No can be used to access to other stations through the own station Setting item Description Valid setting range Target network No Set a network No of another network 1 to 239 Relay network No Set a network No of own network 1 to 239 i Set a station No of the relay station in Relay station No 1 to 120 own network Maximum size of transient o ae Set the maximum transmissio
59. PCI MELSECNET G Controller device is preventing the machine From entering standby Please close all applications and try again IF the problem persists you may need to update this driver lt When entering the hibernation mode gt System Hibernation Failed The device driver For the PCI MELSECNET G Controller device is preventing the machine From entering hibernation Please close all applications and try again If the problem persists you may need to update this driver 3 Corrective action When the personal computer is set to enter the power save mode standby hibernate check and change the setting for when the computer s power button is pressed or the settings of the uninterruptible power supply system UPS on the control panel Appendix 10 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup App 38 Appendix 10 1 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode standby hibernate DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FUNCTIONS ERROR CODES gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES IPOINT When using the CC Link IE Controller Network board Q81BD J71GP21 S SX for PCI Express the screen above is not displayed and a personal computer enters the power saving mode standby hibernate Do not set a personal computer to enter the power save mode standby hibernate lt Behavior wh
60. Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B It failed in the acquisition of SB SW It is not possible to preserve it in the file The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B The file path cannot be set exceeding 255 characters Please select it again Set the file path within 255 characters Read only save target Please confirm save target and execute it again Cancel the write protection at save location It failed in the save of the SB SW file Confirm the position of the save file Change the file to be specified Failed to read the data e Restart the CC IE Control utility e The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B The board is reset All right e Restart the CC IE Control utility The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B Disk space of destination is not enough Please specify other destination 13 1 List of Error Messages in CC IE Control Utility Reserve the disc space of the write destination 13 2 13 1 1 Error messages displayed on the board information screen DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY PROGRAMMING Sm APPLICATION 8 FUNCTIONS ERROR CODES TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX 1 3 ERROR CODES 13 1 2 Error messages displayed on the setting screen 1 Parameter setting screen Error message Corrective action Failed
61. Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 e Windows 8 1 When a personal computer is set to enter the power save mode hibernate sleep or the fast startup function is enabled the following message is displayed and the setting is changed by MELSECPowerManager Changing the settings of power button action in shutdown Changing the settings of power button action in shutdown Invalidating the fast startup settings Appendix 11 1 Installing MELSECPowerManager MELSECPowerManager is installed automatically when the software package is installed to a personal computer The operation starts after the personal computer is restarted Appendix 11 2 Uninstalling MELSECPowerManager MELSECPowerManager is uninstalled automatically when the software package is uninstalled However it is not uninstalled when another software package of MELSEC interface board is installed to the personal computer Uninstall all software packages for MELSEC interface board installed on the personal computer to uninstall MELSECPowerManager Appendix 11 MELSECPowerManager App 42 Appendix 11 1 Installing MELSECPowerManager DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FUNCTIONS ERROR CODES gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES Ts liELSEC Appendix 11 3 Checking MELSECPowerManager The following explains how to check the installation and operating status of
62. When the Load file button is clicked parameters saved in the file can be loaded to the Z CC IE Control utility rs When the attempt to end the CC IE Control utility is made without saving a file after Z B changing the parameter setting a confirmation message is displayed Parameter setting Target board specification M Boad1 Boad2 Boad3 M Board4 Routing parameter 6y ke Board 1 _v ge O Channel No 151 T 5 lt LL Operational setting Network type CCIE Control Contial station gt Mode Online zl Network No 1 4 Group No 0 4 Station No 1 4 mi Network range assignment Driver seting Event setting Target setting R Refresh parameter Check Default 5 Verity Cancel ft POINT z e The data to be saved in the file are the parameters of the boards checked S under Target board specification on the Parameter setting screen 1 e When reading data from the file if parameters different from the checked 5 status of Board 1 to 4 under Target board specification on the Parameter setting screen are read the END button cannot be clicked Change the parameters to match with the checked status of Board 1 to 4 For changing the board number restart the personal computer after changing the channel number in Channel No on the Parameter setting screen For assigning the board numbers and channel numbers refer to the following section Section 6 1 Parameter Settings Boa
63. aborted or failed take corrective actions following the 2 troubleshooting Section 14 2 2 m W gt u S5 28 lt of 20 W gt QW ZE ao N Yoz age WZ 5 one ano if S W A E S 5 2 lt 2 os 23 J tn ez 55 HE CC IE Control UTILITY 7 2 Installation 7 4 T INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES MELSEC 7 3 Uninstallation This section explains a procedure for uninstalling the software package 1 Uninstallation procedure 1 Uninstall the software package from the control panel of Windows Es POINT e If the dialog box confirming the deletion of common files appears at uninstallation make the setting to keep all common files If deleting common files other applications may not operate normally e MELSECPowerManager may not be uninstalled depending on the installation state which affects the other installed software packages For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to the following appendix K Appendix 11 2 When uninstallation is completed normally When the uninstallation is completed normally the icons registered in the Start of Windows are deleted 3 When uninstallation is failed When uninstallation is failed take corrective actions following the troubleshooting Section 14 2 7 3 Uninstallation 8 CC IE Control UTILITY CHAPTER 8 CC IE CONTROL UTILITY This section explains the settings on t
64. again 13 11 The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B 13 2 List of Error Messages in Device Monitor Utility 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER 14 TROUBLESHOOTING This section explains the identification of the causes and corrective actions when an error GE occurred A5 1 Basic checking procedure x Check if there is the corresponding error symptom depending on the situation gt Section 14 1 lt If the corresponding error could not be found check the cause by following the 2 procedure shown below mE 1 Check if all the boards installed on a personal computer are displayed with the utility e Check on the board list screen Section 8 3 1 n e Check on the Event Viewer screen Section 14 5 2 e Check on the Device Manager screen K7 Section 14 5 3 z 2 Check the LED display of the board g e Check the LED status Section 8 5 1 Section 14 3 a 3 Check the error occurring at the utility e Check with test Section 5 5 e Check with CC Link IE Controller network diagnostics Section 8 5 1 4 Check the access target device Sy e Check if the board operates as set to the parameter or program by checking oF whether the link devices perform communication or transient send receive BS performs normally with the device monitor utility Chapter 9 5 Check the user program e Check the arguments of the communication function Chapter 12 e Check the returned va
65. and s s large volume data s communication a Suununuasnt CC Link IE Controller Network board ES POINT 1 The CC Link IE Controller Network is a system developed to improve the MELSECNET H network system PLC to PLC network allowing communications of a larger data volume at a higher speed For details of the comparison between the CC Link IE Controller Network board and the MELSECNETZ H board refer to the following Appendix K5 Appendix 4 Comparison with the MELSECNET H Board 2 CC Link IE Controller Network boards MELSECNET H boards and MELSECNET H modules cannot be mixed in the same network Must be separated into different networks e CC Link IE Controller Network board Used for CC Link IE Controller Network e MELSECNET H board or MELSECNET H module Used for MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 1 1 1 1 Overview 1 OVERVIEW 1 2 Features The features of the CC Link IE Controller Network board are shown below OVERVIEW 1 Personal computer can be incorporated into CC Link IE Controller Network By installing the CC Link IE Controller Network board to a personal computer the z personal computer can be used as a control station or normal station of the CC Link 7 IE Controller Network a ae gt 9O 2 Universal PCI PCI Express are applicable 99 a Q80BD J71GP21 SX Q80BD J71GP21S SX The following PCI slots
66. by the ae simulator with noise frequency with noise frequency 25 to 60Hz 25 to 60Hz 2 Internal current 5 1 10A 5VDC 2 07A 3 3VDC Z consumption gt Weight 0 12kg 0 14kg 0 13kg 0 14kg 1 This indicates the number of CC Link IE Controller Network boards that can be installed to a arin personal computer not including any other boards such as MELSECNET H boards Zs Note that it cannot exceed the number of physical PCI slots of the personal computer On 2 Use the power complies with CLASS2 anes AVE eae i as SER 3 3 Optical Fiber Cable Specifications io For optical fiber cables refer to the following manual K5 CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual x Won ue 3 4 Buffer Memory z T For buffer memory refer to the following manual K CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual ih ace 293 eels Scie 253 g 5 gt uE 85 3 3 Optical Fiber Cable Specifications 3 3 4 FUNCTIONS CHAPTE 4 1 Basic functions Application functions R4 FUNCTIONS This chapter explains functions of the CC Link IE Controller Network board Function List The following lists the functions of the CC Link IE Controller Network board Cyclic transmission function Communication by LB LW Periodical communication Communication by LX LY Assurance of cyclic data integrity Block data assurance per station station based block data assurance Cyclic transmission punctuality assurance Cons
67. circuit or malfunction For the tightening torque of the board fixing screws refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer Before handling the board touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the board to fail or malfunction Install the board to a personal computer which is compliant with PCI standard or PCI Express standard 5 Section 2 5 Operating Environment Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction Securely insert the board into the PCI slot following the board installation instruction of the personal computer Incorrect insertion of the board may lead to a malfunction failure or drop of the board When installing the board take care not to get injured by an implemented component or a surrounding member When installing the board take care not to contact with other boards Handle the board in a place where static electricity will not be generated Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction The board is included in an antistatic envelope When storing or transporting it be sure to put it in the antistatic envelope Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction Do not drop or apply a strong impact to the board Doing so may cause a failure or malfunction Wiring Precautions WARNING Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before installing
68. data Group No 1 z i fe 2 1Ns6 1Ns5 1Ns4 Group No 1 Group No 1 2 Setting method Set the group number of the CC Link IE Controller Network board using the Parameter setting screen of the CC IE Control utility z F E me OF ae a5 are Parameter setting o Q Target board specification 9 M Boadi Boad2 Boad3 Boad4 Routing parameter a fe Board 1 v m Channel No 151 v r Operational setting O fe 5 a5 Network type CCIE Contral Control station x Mode Online Y n a Network No 105 Group No 4 Station No 1 H 9 ke Network range assignment Driver setting Event setting Target setting Refresh parameter Check Default N O Load file Save file Verify End Cancel a __loadtie __ Savefie_ cea 5 o o lt Set a desired group number x lt i Q z 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 1 2 15 12 1 3 Group function 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 12 1 4 SEND RECV function The SEND RECV function sends receives data to from other station s programmable controller using the MELSEC data link library function This function supports the SEND RECV instruction of link dedicated instruction Es POINT For details of the functions refer to the following manual K5 MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 1 SEND function The SEND function sends data from the own station to the specified channel of the specified station using the mdSend md
69. eeeaoeoeeaeeeee 32 ae lt i ERROR CODES TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX 9 7 Changing Word Device Double Word Device Values 9 8 Q DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY 9 8 Tuning Bit Devices ON and OFF This section explains the method for turning ON and OFF specified bit devices 1 Selecting the menu Select Device Write Bit device setting Bit device resetting 2 Setting screen Bit Device Set Device Type Device Type x direct link input Network No DeviceNo HEX CDEC ocT 0000 4 Cancel Item Description Set a type of a device whose value is to be changed Device Type Enter a network number for LX LY LB and LSB Set a number of a device whose value is to be changed Device No HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal A WARNING When changing data during operation configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely Configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure 4 POINT The only devices that can be monitored using the Bit device setting resetting are ones that have random access capability If a device that is not capable of random access is specified a device type error 3 will occur For details of the random access capability of each device refer to the
70. following chapter K3 MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 9 9 9 8 Tuning Bit Devices ON and OFF Q DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEG A bit device can also be turned ON and OFF by double clicking the device number on the monitoring screen Note that this function is only applicable when the display format is in Vertical Indication e f e zZ e W 8 gt Wu Qa x 0 xt HE 0 al Be 0 me 2 0 eeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeaeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeee O z z oO O x jab APPLICATION FUNCTIONS ERROR CODES APPENDICES TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX 9 8 Tuning Bit Devices ON and OFF 9 10 Q DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY 9 9 Switching a Display Format This section explains the method for switching a display format such as in hexadecimal or in decimal for the monitoring function 1 Selecting the menu Select Data Format Word device Double Word device Bit device The following sections 2 3 and 4 show the menus that can be selected with the Batch monitor and 16 point register monitor functions 2 Word devices Display format Batch monitor 16 point register monitor DEC decimal signed 16 bits O O DEC decimal unsigned 16 bits O HEX hexadecimal 16 bits O OCT octal 16 bits O O O O BIN binary 16 bits O DEC decimal signed 32 bits O DEC decimal unsigned 32 bits O O O O O
71. format m W 2 CC IE Control utility E Collation result a Mismatch in No of Channel setting of Board n 1 Mismatch in network type of Board n 3 fia Mismatch in network setting of Board n Mismatch in No of Channel setting of Board n APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 3 File Output App 20 Appendix 3 4 Verification result file APPENDICES Appendix 4 Comparison with the MELSECNET H Board App 21 This section explains the comparison of functions between the CC Link IE Controller Network board and the MELSECNET H board as well as utility functions provided with the boards Appendix 4 1 Comparison of boards The following describes the comparison of functions between the CC Link IE Controller Network board and the MELSECNET H board 1 Comparison of the cyclic transmission functions CC Link IE Controller Function MELSECNET H board Network board Cyclic communication function by LB LW Cyclic communication function by LX LY Interlink transfer Link data consistency function Punctuality guarantee function Constant link scan function x OI OLO x OIO O O X O X OF O Low speed cyclic transmission function 2 Comparison of the transient transmission functions CC Link IE Controller Function MELSECNET H board Network board Number of transient transmissions O O Group function x O Routing function O O Read from wri
72. gt Programs gt Programs and Features gt Turn Windows on the control panel and enabling the function of NET Framework 3 5 az features on or off gt tu Windows downloads required files connecting to Windows Update includ i ng N ET 2 0 and 3 0 y The procedure when NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 and 3 0 is disabled is the same procedure as MELSOFT products For details of the procedure refer to the technical bulletin FA A 0153 Click Install this feature 2 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 R2 Screen Corrective action ReadOnly File Detected x LGOTA ONE Y ERROR CODES An option you selected requires that files be installed to your system or files be uninstalled from your system or both A read only file CAWINNT System32 Drivers 4Mnetg2k sys was found while performing the needed file operations on your system To perform the file operation click the N Yes button otherwise click No Click the Yes button 5 Q z W Qo a lt x lt W Q Z 14 2 Troubleshooting of Installation Uninstallation 14 7 14 2 3 When the corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective at installation 4 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG Software Installation The software you are installing has not passed Windows Logo g P r M S g A testing to verify its compatibility with this version of Windows Tell This screen is d isplayed at t
73. in error by system switching mdDevSetEx mdDevRstEx mdRandREx mdRandWEx MELSEC data link library mdReceiveEx mdSendEx mdControl mdDevRst mdDevSet mdRandR mdRandW mdReceive mdSend mdTypeRead App 3 Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System APPENDICES MELSEC b The following example gives a flowchart for error occurrence at batch write Write processing mdSend instruction etc YES Did an error occur NO Check the error code Does the error require retry YES _Retry processing processing NO Execute normal processing Execute wait processing End 1 For the details and corrective action of the error code refer to Error code returned to request source during communication with CPU module in the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 2 Execute retry processing as required depending on the system specifications Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System App 4 DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY APPLICATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING ERROR CODES gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES 4 Automatic switching of communication path When a communication error occurs during access to the Redundant CPU connected via MELSECNET H the communication path is automatically switched to continue access to the control system Hereinafter this automatic swi
74. monitor utilities x x O O x O O O OI OF O x x App 23 The following describes the comparison of the Device monitor utility functions between the CC Link IE Controller Network board and the MELSECNET H board Function Batch monitor function CC Link IE Controller Network board MELSECNET H board 16 point register monitor function Monitor target setting function Monitor device setting function Word device value change function Word device value continuous change function Bit device ON OFF function Display format change function Numerical pad function OIO OI O O O OC OC O Appendix 4 Comparison with the MELSECNET H Board Appendix 4 2 Comparison of MELSECNET utilities O O O O O O OC OF O APPENDICES Appendix 4 4 Precautions for replacing programs x The following table explains modifications required when utilizing MELSECNET H user ao OF programs a E A modification of the argument for opening a communication line g Channel No mdOpen is required since the channel numbers are changed from 51 to 54 to 151 to 154 lt Change the read data contents of own board mode setting Ck mdBdModSet own board mode read mdBdModRead own board IE Own board access Sei LED read mdBdLedRead own board switch status read mdBdSwRead and own board version read mdBdVerRead 9 Appendix 4 5 Precautions for setting parameters Z
75. normal station of the network LW 16K points Set as a control station of the network CC IE Control Extended mode Control station Extend LB LW assignment range LB 32K points Set as a normal station of the network LW 128K points CC IE Control Extended mode Normal station Extend LB LW assignment range b Mode Set the operation mode of the CC Link IE Controller Network board Select item Description Reference Normal operation mode Online e Connects the own station to the network e Exchanges data with other stations Operation stop mode Offline e Disconnects the own station from the network Does not exchange data with other stations Checks the hardware for bus I F function of the CC Link Bus F test Section 5 5 1 IE Controller Network board Checks the internal hardware of the CC Link IE Controller H W test Section 5 5 2 Network board Tests the hardware including communication circuit for Self loopback test transmission system and connection cables by a single Section 5 5 3 unit of the CC Link IE Controller Network board 6 1 Parameter Settings Board Information Settings 6 5 SYSTEM PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS ez fr MEO zZ As awn INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING CC IE Control UTILITY SOFTWARE PACKAGES 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELS a
76. of the board O O mdBdSwRead Reads the switch status of the board O O mdBdVerRead Reads the version information of the board O O mdinit Refreshes the programmable controller device address O O Batch writes devices O O masend Sends data SEND function o2 O Batch reads devices O O michoceive Receives data RECV function oO O mdRandW Writes devices randomly O O mdRandR Reads devices randomly O O mdDevSet Sets a bit device Q O mdDevRst Resets a bit device O O App 25 1 Supported by the 1 15R or later version of SWODNC MNETH B 2 Supported by the 1 08J or later version of SW1DNC MNETG B Appendix 4 Comparison with the MELSECNET H Board Appendix 4 6 Comparison of the data link library functions APPENDICES Appendix 5 Combinations with Existing Software x z S There is no restriction when using CC Link IE Controller Network board with other W gt MELSEC interface boards or MELSOFT products on the same personal computer For the 2E restrictions of the applicable operating environment or applicable access target refer to the manual of each product 2 9 a oO zZ o O 5 z OF JO EZ oT ERROR CODES gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 5 Combinations with Existing Software App 26 APPENDICES Appendix 6 Checking Serial Number and Function Version This section explains how to check serial numbe
77. of this product treat it as industrial waste 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT x The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establi
78. overlapping Please set them so that they do not overlap Set the LB LW settings 1 not to overlap The LB LW settings 2 are overlapping Please set them so that they do not overlap The L station to M station setting in LX LY settings 1 are overlapping Please set them so that they do not overlap Set the LB LW settings 2 not to overlap Set the L station to M station setting in LX LY settings 1 not to overlap The M station to L station setting in LX LY settings 1 are overlapping Please set them so that they do not overlap Set the M station to L station setting in LX LY settings 1 not to overlap The L station to M station setting in LX LY settings 2 are overlapping Please set them so that they do not overlap Set the L station to M station setting in LX LY settings 2 not to overlap The M station to L station setting in LX LY settings 2 are overlapping Please set them so that they do not overlap Set the M station to L station setting in LX LY settings 2 not to overlap Master station XX is not set Please set the master station Set the I O master station XX Can not set all stations as Reserved station Please change any of the station to other than reserved station Change one or more specified reserved station that is set as a network range assignment to stations other than reserved stations The number of LB points per station exceeds 16384 points Please set the settings
79. own station SWO0A7 Conditions e Valid when the Baton pass status of own station SB0047 is OFF If the Baton pass status of own station SB0047 is ON abnormal the previous data is maintained e Reserved stations and the maximum station number and later are out of the subject 11 1 Precautions on Programming 11 1 1 Interlock related signals All stations are normal Abnormal station s exists BISL PROGRAMMING Description Stores a cyclic transmission status of each station If a station that has not executed the cyclic Device status Cyclic Cyclic transmission transmission is found the station number is All stations are oo f TA i transmission not SBOOBO status of each stored to the Cyclic transmission status of each executing Cyclic B executed station s station station SWOOBO to SW00B7 transmission exists Conditions Same conditions as SBOOAO Stores a baton pass status of each station b15b14 to b9 b8 b7 b6 to b1 b0 SWOO0AO SWOO0A1 SWO0A2 SWO0A3 WOOA pore Baton pass status SWOOA4 Normal baton pass Abnormal baton o of each station SWOOAS station pass station 00A7 SWO0A6 112 SW00A7 0 Numbers from1 to 120 in the table indicate station numbers Numbers for b8 to b15 of SWO0A7 are 0 fixed Conditions Same conditions as SBOOAO Stores a data link cyclic transmission status of ea
80. power is on Doing so may result in a malfunction Startup Maintenance Precautions CAUTION Thoroughly read the manual and ensure the safety before performing program modification during operation forced output operation such as RUN STOP and PAUSE An improper operation will result in mechanical damage or accidents Do not disassemble or modify the board Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Fix the board by tighten the board fixing screws within the specified torque range Undertightening may cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening may damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction For the tightening torque of the board fixing screws refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer Before handling the board touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the board to fail or malfunction The board is included in an antistatic envelope When storing or transporting it be sure to put it in the antistatic envelope Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction The microprocessor built in the board will reach a high temperature during operation Do not touch it directly when replacing the board Doing so may result in a failure malfunction or injury Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing
81. procedure 1 NOOO BW N Check the installation uninstallation precautions 5 Section 7 1 If the creation of 8 3 filename is disabled perform the operation 1 in this section Insert the CD ROM in the CD ROM drive Display the Run screen from the Start of Windows or Quick Access Menu Append A and execute Disk1 Setup exe of the CD ROM Install the utility again by following the installation procedure Perform the uninstallation If the utility cannot be uninstalled normally check if the personal computer has any problems e Operating Environment Section 2 5 e Checking personal computer and operating system Section 14 3 2 If the troubleshooting above does not help refer to Section 14 9 1 Operation for the creation of 8 3 filename is disabled 4 POINT 1 Enable the creation of 8 3 filename 2 Insert the CD ROM in the CD ROM drive 3 Display the Run screen from the Start menu or Quick Access Menu of Windows 4 Append G and execute Disk1 Setup exe on the CD ROM 5 Perform the uninstallation The option to append G to Setup exe is supported only by SW1DNC MNETG B Version1 17T or later 14 2 Troubleshooting of Installation Uninstallation 14 5 14 2 2 Uninstallation failed DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK PROGRAMMING LIBRARY APPLICATION FUNCTIONS LGOTA ONE Y ERROR CODES APPENDICES INDEX 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC
82. specific location Advanced and click 9 I our hardnaro came with an installation CD the Next gt button 6y z What do you want the wizard to do 2 5 be so ain opa a Becommende ie 5 O lisiallfiom a let or specie locaton Advanced install from a list or specific location Advanced Te Click Next to continue a 2 Select Search for the best driver in these locations Found New Hardware Wizard ip W Please choose your search and installation options lt For 32 bit version operating system gt 9 a p w 7 x PERAE RE ee Check Include this location in the search and specify Drivers x86 Q a a of the CD ROM drive to be used a A ae Example D Drivers x86 4 D Drivers x86 v Browse A a lt For 64 bit version operating system gt S Don t search will choose the driver to install Choo con select he device diver fom a i Windons does not guerartes that Check Include this location in the search and specify Drivers x64 2 lt of the CD ROM drive to be used H l ERT ETE Example D Drivers x64 a 1 The operating system can be checked by Windows system information For details refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base http support microsoft com kb 827218 As of August 2013 End APPENDICES INDEX 14 2 Troubleshooting of Installation Uninstallation 1 4 9 14 2 4 When the driver is not installed 1 4 TRO
83. station any of the control station and from the start to the end stations NO je y Perform self loopback test to the control station and from the start to end stations YES Did data link start YES Does a faulty station exist NO je Replace the CC Link IE Controller Network board or network module installed mounted to the faulty station NO Check the loop line using station to station test y Replace the faulty link cable YES Did data link start YES Did data link start Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative End 14 4 Flowchart when Data Link Failed 14 4 4 Flowchart when data link among whole system is disabled 14 21 DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FUNCTIONS LGOTA lei cee ERROR CODES APPENDICES INDEX 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 4 5 Flowchart when data link to specific station is disabled An error occurred Detect a faulty station with the CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen Review the parameter set to the control station Does a faulty station exist Is the parameter correct Programmable controller Select the faulty station and check the error description Take a corrective a
84. status when the external power supply is being lt supplied g g When the external power supply is not being supplied refer to 1 in this section we because the network status is the same status as the external power supply function is not applied z a When the system is started Data link status Data link status 2 External Personal Loop Communication of own station other than own a Time frame power computer re status baton cyclic station cyclic supply power SEHE pass status 2 transmission transmission status status External power supply OFF zZ 1 ies OFF OFF E External power supply ON Ze External power supply ON az 2 Before personal computer ON OFF lt i Loopback start up power ON Error Error Error occurred Personal computer start up ower ON 3 ON ON it Before CC Link IE Controller a O Network board driver start up x CC Link IE Controller Network Loopback 4 Fe i board driver in operation On on occurred ener Error Normal m After CC Link IE Controller 5 Network board driver start up ON ON Normal Normal Normal Normal 9 Q b When the system is shut down 2 i Data link status Data link status 2 External Personal Communication of own station other than own fe Time frame power computer status baton cyclic station cyclic A supply power pass status 2 transmission transmission status status Personal computer power OFF ON OFF Normal Normal Error Normal p
85. tees Section 8 2 2 Ending the utility a S Or ae oS End ZJ aes 296 BSS 250 oe 5 i e Ss o 8 8 2 Operating Procedure 8 3 8 CC IE Control UTILITY MELSEC 8 2 1 Starting the utility Start the utility by clicking the icon 2 registered in the Start of Windows 4 Start screen All apps or Start All Programs 2 CC IE Control Utility Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC NETG B Version 1 17T or later fm MELSEC gt Fd CC IE Control utili ET a E Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 f EQ Device Monitor Utility E MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual an BD cs or Shut Do Start the CC IE Control utility IPOINT 1 Only one utility can be run 2 When a utility is run while user account control UAC is available the following warning screen appears Click the Allow or Yes button to run the utility Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before Program name MnetgUtl exe E MnetgUtl exe Publisher Unknown Unidentified Publisher File origin Hard drive on this computer n show deta Ce I don t know where this program is from or what it s for Allow Change when these notifications appear I trust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer For details on how to prevent th
86. the parameters are initialized at installation Save the parameters with the save file function before installing the utility Note that the board numbers and channel numbers which have been set may be changed after installation In this case set the board numbers and channel numbers again For changing the board number restart the personal computer after changing the channel number in Channel No on the Parameter setting screen For assigning the board numbers and channel numbers refer to the following section Section 6 1 Parameter Settings Board Information Settings lt Assigning channel numbers to the CC Link IE Controller Network boards gt lt Assigning board numbers in the CC IE Control utility gt When the software package has been installed in the environment that the creation of 8 3 filename is disabled the software package may not be uninstalled Enable the creation of 8 3 filename before installing the software package For the method on how to check and change the status of 8 3 filename creation to enable disable refer to the website of Microsoft Corporation e e e 7 1 Installation and Uninstallation Precautions T INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES MELSEC 7 2 Installation if This section explains a procedure for installing software package S 1 Installation 1 Insert the CD ROM to the CD ROM drive 2 Double click the Setup exe file on the CD ROM Ke 3 By f
87. to be monitored and estimated possibility of path switching gt Possibility of path switching Reference Since a system switching request from the network module llr Either one is other than 0 bea 2 Fig 1 was detected path switching may have been executed Since other system error occurred path switching may have i ON 0 0 2 Fig 2 been executed Since other system error occurred or a system switching 2 Fig 2 ig ON Either one is other than0O request from the network module was detected path 2 4 ig ie 32 switching may have been executed Even if SM1600 is ON path switching does not occur when the CPU is not accessed via the tracking cable When using SM1600 SD1590 and SD1690 to estimate the occurrence of path switching for the Redundant CPU connected via MELSECNET H check the following items on the Redundant settings in the network parameter of GX Developer e Issue system switch in Cable disconnection timeout e Issue system switch in communication error Check the following based on the statuses of the above special relay and special registers and remove the error cause e Check the Redundant CPU for an error e Check the tracking cable status and whether the tracking cable is correctly connected e Check both the relevant network module and the network where that relevant network module is connected for an error Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System App 6 DEVICE MONI
88. x Wie to the selected station Be O Close Closes the Link start stop screen o 1 A pop up menu screen to select from Select group Select all and Cancel Select all is displayed when right clicking the mouse on the line where each group in the All station status P field are displayed Selective status can be changed on this pop up menu E 2 Reserved stations are not displayed 5 3 Link start can be also executed from the stations other than the stop request stations 2 D ja N icp Zz O O Z m W u a Sa 28 I lt Am O iS ow ZE ae N Yoz age OEE one ano if 0 as QO ZOR Sig Ses ae Sl E26 253 oe 5 i e Ss o 8 8 5 Diagnostics Screen 8 39 8 5 3 Link start stop screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 5 4 Logging screen This screen is displayed by clicking the Logging button on the CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen Section 8 5 1 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen It is used to monitor the transmission path switch of the connected stations and transient transmission error history It is also used to clear the error information lt lt Monitor detail gt gt Display Station Network No Station No era Enor clea Switch transmission path Loop Status Item Display station lt lt Error clear gt gt Display Station 7 a Wt so
89. x 0008 oif 0008 B 0008 0 SB 0008 Sw 0008 a x 0009 off 0009 B 0009 O SB 0009 Sw 0009 x 000A Of 000A B 000A O SB 000A SW 000A x 0006 O Y 0008 B 00068 SB 0006 SW 0006 x lt 000C Oy 000C B 000C SB 000C Sw 000C x 000D off 000D B 000D OSB 000D SW 000D x 000E ofY 000E B 000E SB 000E SW 000E x OOOF oji 000F B 000F SB 000F SW 000F z 151 CC IE Control Data Format On The Channel Information in the Current Display Screen Word device E Z Network No 0 Station No 255 lt O DEC 16bit AO EZ E lt LL Item Description id Displays the current device status S a 1 Device information 1 For changing a display format refer to the following section Q C5 Section 9 9 Switching a Display Format i Displays the network status currently set 2 Network status For setting networks refer to the following section C Section 9 5 Setting a Monitor Target S Displays type of devices word device duble word device or bit device being displayed and 5 W display format a For changing a device type refer to the following section 2 3 Data format F is lt 5 Section 9 6 Setting a Device to be Monitored For changing a display format refer to the following section lt Section 9 9 Switching a Display Format 1 The number of displayed columns will differ depending on the settings of a connection target CPU ni and display format 2 A g fou lt x lt W Q zZ 9 4 Setting the 16 point Register Monitor Fu
90. 000 B ne Channel No Network No Group No Station No Network Type a2 151 1 0 1 CC Link IE Controller Network Control station X SB SW information Z Device Value Device Value lt B0000 0 SWWO0000 0000 ray B0001 0 SWW0001 0000 A z 5B0002 0 SWO002 0000 5 g B0003 0 SWO0003 0000 o B0004 0 SW0004 0000 B0005 0 SW0005 0000 B0006 0 SWO0006 0000 Z s in 50 BG OE az lt i ERROR CODES gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 3 File Output App 18 Appendix 3 2 SB SW file APPENDICES i CELSE Appendix 3 3 Error log file Error log files are output in the CSV file format under the folder of specified items when the Save error log button is clicked on the lt lt Monitor detail gt gt tab in the Logging screen Display Station Network No 7 Group No J Station No Switch transmission path Loop Status aes PPEERE GHJA 1 For switch transmission path Error log files for switch transmission path save the following items e Loop status e Loopback station IN e Loopback station OUT e Date An example of the error log file for switch transmission path is shown below Loop status Loopback station IN Loopback station OUT Date Normal 2007 03 01 11 06 50 Loopback 2 1 2007 03 01 11 06 49 Normal 2007 03 01 11 01 11 Loopback 1
91. 09 07 14 13 41 Shortcut 2KB De T Eh Local security Poticy 2010 0317544 Shortcut E Cli k th b tt Pie maase enon screen appears Click the Continue or Yes button 2 H Videos 2009 07 1413 41 Shortcut 2KB E system Configuration 2009 07 1413 41 Shortcut 2KB 5 i Computer F Task Scheduler 2009 07 14 13 42 Shorter 2KB if F E T a es ASS Seok E Gama z Gig Network HF Windows Memory Diagnostic 2009 07 1413 41 Shortcut 2KB ne alo gry pe E Bee EA ETE Winde is your permission to continue If you started this action continue o gt EREA aak pmi Haare Ma Management Console m a Microsoft Windows T W Q a Local security Poy Date moamea wi0 03 17544 Date rented 0100 17 A4 Details Shortcut Sie 121KB iadi User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer 4 5 Select Local Policies Security Settings gt EA Account Policies gt Local Policies E Windows Firewall with Advanced Sec Network List Manager Policies gt Bl Public Key Policies Bl Software Restriction Policies Mity gt M Appication Control Policies IE Software Restriction Policies b iP securty Potcies on Local Comput E Application Control Policies Application Control Policies o E Advanced Audit Policy Configuration SJ Security Policies on Local Computer Intemet Protocol Security Psec Administratio E Advanced Audi Policy Configuration Advanced Audi Policy Configuration icy Configu
92. 1 Appendix 2 1 Appendix 3 1 Appendix 3 4 Appendix 5 Appendix 5 1 Appendix 5 6 Appendix 7 Appendix 8 Deletion CHAPTER 11 Section 12 3 to Section 12 9 Section 15 1 Appendix 2 1 1 Appendix 2 1 2 CHAPTER 12 to 16 are changed to CHAPTER 11 to 15 Section 2 6 is changed to Appendix 4 and 7 Section 15 2 and 15 3 are changed to Section 15 1 and 15 2 Appendix 6 is changed to Appendix 3 Appendix 4 is changed to Appendix 6 Appendix 3 is changed to Appendix 8 Appendix 7 is changed to Appendix 9 Correction PRECAUTIONS FOR USE Section 3 1 CHAPTER 5 is changed to Appendix 9 Appendix 9 is changed to Appendix 10 Addition Appendix 11 Appendix 12 Correction Section 2 5 Section 7 1 1 Section 7 1 3 Section 7 2 Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Section 2 5 Section 3 1 Section 3 2 Section 5 4 Section 7 1 2 Section 11 1 1 Section 11 3 Section 14 2 Section 14 3 A 11 Print Date Sep 2013 Jun 2014 Jan 2015 Manual Number SH NA 080691ENG P SH NA 080691ENG Q SH NA 080691ENG R Revision Addition Section 3 4 Section 5 3 3 Section 5 3 4 Section 8 2 3 Section 14 2 1 Section 14 2 2 Section 14 3 3 Section 14 7 1 Section 14 7 2 Appendix 7 1 Appendix 7 2 Appendix 8 Appendix 10 3 Correction PRECAUTIONS FOR USE HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Section 1 2 Section
93. 1 Cyclic transmission processing a fe 1 Cyclic transmission processing z Cyclic transmission is performed using the LB LW LX LY devices of the CC Link IE o Controller Network board and the CC Link IE Controller Network module D2 The steps shown below are for the case of the link relay B on the personal computer side 1 BO on the sending side personal computer turns on g 2 By a link refresh the BO information is stored in the refresh data storage area 2 LB of the CC Link IE Controller Network board O 3 The BO information in the refresh data storage area LB is stored in the link a data storage area LB 4 4 By a link scan the BO information in the link data storage area LB is stored in a link device LB of the CC Link IE Controller Network module on the receiving side 5 By a link refresh the BO information is stored in a device B of the CPU module FUNCTIONS 6 BO of the receiving side CPU module turns on Sending side personal computer Receiving side programmable controller PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION CC Link IE CPU module Controller Network module LB B 1 Personal computer CC Link IE Controller Network board i 1 i i i LB LB Sequence scan 1 1 1 1 1 i r 1 1 i i i 1 BO turns ON i r 1 1 i 1 i 2 4 5 f User l CC Link IE Refresh 3 Link data i F Link device gt Link scan Device i 1
94. 2 2007 03 01 11 01 04 2 For transient transmission error Error log files for transient transmission error save the following items e Error code e Target network No e Target station No e Date An example of the error log file for transient transmission error is shown below Error code Target net Target station No Date E5F0 1 23 2007 03 01 11 14 54 E5F0 1 23 2007 03 01 11 14 53 E5F0 1 23 2007 03 01 11 14 52 E5F0 1 23 2007 03 01 11 14 51 App 19 Appendix 3 File Output Appendix 3 3 Error log file APPENDICES Appendix 3 4 Verification result file x Z g Verification is performed when the Verify button is clicked on the Parameter setting Ha screen ie SS Parameter setting x Target board specification 2 ii V Board1 Boad2 Board3 Board4 Routing parameter A Ors me nxt Board j1 T el Channel No 151 v Operational setting oO zZ Network type cc IE Contral Control station Mode Online 0 Network No 1 Group No 0 Station No z Network range assignment Driver setting Event setting Target setting Refresh parameter Check Default gt T q2 Load file Save file End Cancel s 5 ot tu When the verification result shows a verification mismatch a message prompting a user to save a file is displayed The verification result is saved in a text format file by clicking the ip Yes button 3 O 5 The following shows the verification result file
95. 2 i fai 2 1 6 1 Used when sending a response a lt 8 Relay station 1 1 7 1 Used when sending a response lt W Q zZ 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 1 2 13 12 1 2 Routing function 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 7 Calculation of transmission delay time The processing time to access a station on another network using the MELSEC Data Link Library functions in a multiple network system can be obtained by adding the following transmission delay factors Routing transmission delay time processing time from request source to relay station processing time from relay station to request target a Processing time from request source to relay station This is the transmission delay time from the request source the station that executed the function to the routing relay station In the following example it is the time required for the data to be transmitted from station 1Mp1 to station 1Ns3 For the calculation of translation delay time refer to the following manual K CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual b Processing time from relay station to request target This is the transmission delay time from the relay station to the request target the station to be accessed In the following example it is the time required for the data to be transmitted from station 2MpP1 to station 2Ns3 For the calculation of translation delay time refer to the following manual K CC Lin
96. 3 Browse Example D Drivers x86 O Dont search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware lt For 64 bit version operating system 1 gt Check Include this location in the search and specify Drivers x64 of the CD ROM drive to be used Example D Drivers x64 1 The operating system can be checked by Windows system Cancel information For details refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base i http support microsoft com kb 827218 As of August 2013 End If the troubleshooting above does not help refer to Section 14 9 S POINT If Block Never install unsigned driver software is selected under Control Panel System Hardware Driver Signing the driver may not be installed Select Ignore Install the software anyway and don t ask for my approval or Warn Prompt me each time to choose an action and install the driver 1 4 10 14 2 Troubleshooting of Installation Uninstallation 14 2 4 When the driver is not installed 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEG 14 3 When CC Link IE Controller Network Board did not Operate x Normally z OE When the personal computer on which the board is installed is not started or the system DE shut down or system reset is occurred check the items following
97. 3 ERROR CODES Monitor the device to be accessed using the device monitor of the monitor function utility Or write data by performing Data changing Could the device be monitored Could the data be written YES Review the user program K Chapter 13 ERROR CODES Check the CC Link IE Controller Network board settings YES Did an error occur Did the error occur in accessing to the own station Check the error with referring to Section 14 4 Flowchart when Data Link Failed YES 14 5 Flowchart for Error during Data Link 14 5 2 Flowchart when data cannot be written or read with user program TROUBLESHOOTING M LS 14 5 3 Flowchart when communications are occasionally disabled during user program execution Did the error code return to the YES user program Chapter 13 ERROR CODES for the error description and check the user program and access station Start the diagnostics function of the CC IE Control utility YES Does a faulty station exist Replace the link cable or faulty station Change the system so that the control station and a normal station are configured on a one on one basis Was data link normally NO performed Replace the link cable or connected station added Add adjacent stations in order and monitor faulty stations on the CC Link
98. 31 Appendix 9 Warning Message Appears on Windows Appendix 9 1 Overview of warning message APPENDICES iii isl Se Appendix 9 2 Methods for preventing the warning message 4 POINT The user account control UAC function prevents a crash e g prevention of start up of a program which executes unintended operation Before setting this function grasp that the security function offered by UAC will be disabled and fully understand the risk DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY The following two methods are available for preventing a warning message MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 1 Disabling the user account control function The following shows a procedure for disabling the user account control function a Using Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 1 Open Control Panel Internet Internet Explorer E mail q Windows Mail PROGRAMMING a Welcome Center Backup Status and Configuration gt Windows Media Player D Small Business Resources Recent Items BJ Windows Fax and Scan g Windows Meeting Space APPLICATION FUNCTIONS ly Windows Photo Gallery B Windows Live Messenger Download Paint gt All Programs N W Q 2 Select User Accounts 9 a O a System and Maintenance User Accounts Get started with Windows OA orrena uranu w Appearance and Personalization Z Clock Language and Region Bd eee 5 reek 9 Ease of Access T Hardware anid Sound Let Windows suggest settings wn
99. 8 1 3 Section 8 2 Section 8 3 Section 9 1 1 Section 9 2 Section 9 3 1 Section 9 3 3 Section 9 4 1 Section 9 4 6 Section 11 1 1 Section 11 1 2 Section 12 2 Section 12 6 Section 12 7 Section 14 3 CHAPTER 15 Section 16 4 3 Appendix 5 6 Appendix 6 1 Appendix 6 2 Appendix 6 4 Addition Section 6 7 Section 14 1 4 Correction PRECAUTIONS FOR USE Section 4 1 Section 6 1 Section 8 1 3 Sep 2009 SH NA 080691ENG H Section 9 4 5 Section 9 4 6 Section 12 4 Section 13 1 1 Section 14 Section 15 1 Appendix 2 Index Deletion Section 14 1 Section 14 2 and 14 3 are changed to Section14 1 and 14 2 May 2008 SH NA 080691ENG D Print Date Manual Number May 2010 SH NA 080691ENG Jun 2010 SH NA 080691ENG J Revision Addition CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MANUAL GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Section 1 2 Section 2 5 Section 3 1 Section 3 2 Section 5 1 2 Section 6 2 1 Section 6 2 2 Section 6 3 Section 6 4 Section 6 4 2 Section 6 5 1 Section 6 5 2 Section 6 5 3 Section 6 6 1 Section 6 6 2 Section 6 7 1 Section 7 1 Section 7 2 Section 7 3 1 to 7 3 3 Section 8 1 Section 8 1 1 Section 8 1 3 Section 8 2 Section 8 3 Section 9 2 1 Section 9 2 3 Section 9 4 1 Section 9 4 2 Section 9 5 1 Section 10 2 1 Section 10 2 3 Section 11 1 2 CHAPTER 12
100. 9 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Mitsubishi PC Interface Board MELSEG CC Link IE Controller Network Interface Board User s Manual For SW1DNC MNETG B Q80BD J71GP21 SX Q80BD J71GP21S SX Q81BD J71GP21 SX Q81BD J71GP21S SX SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Be sure to read these instructions before using the product Before using this product read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and handle the product correctly with full attention to safety Note that these precautions apply only to this product Refer to the user s manual of your CPU module for safety precautions on programmable controller systems In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as AN WARNING and AN CAUTION AN WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury A Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Note that failure to observe the Z CAUTION level instructions may also lead to serious results depending on the circumstances Be sure to observe the instructions of both levels to ensure personal safety Please store this manual in a safe place for future reference This manual must be forwarded to the end user Design Precautions WARNING Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system operates
101. C Link IE Controller gt Network board S O 1 Precautions for general wiring 6 Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before z A WARNING installing the board or starting wiring Sn Failure to do so may result in electric shock damage to the product or Ei malfunction as After installation of the board and wiring attach the cover on the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock n O E When disconnecting the cable from the board do not pull the cable by the a A CAUTION cable part a Pulling the cable connected to the board may result in malfunction or damage to the board or cable Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the personal computer A Such foreign matter may cause a fire failure or malfunction 5 Always ground the personal computer to the protective ground conductor S Failure to do so may cause a malfunction ma ol 2 Precautions for communication cable wiring Place the communication cable and the external power supply cable A CAUTION connected to the board in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cables may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the board or cables or malfunctions due to poor contact Special skills and tools are required to connect the communication cable to Ww 7 e e w m A o E E W N a z lt iy zaz 590 OOF Wu One Zua ano the conn
102. Checked Select when using the driver WDT function Unchecked im function Unchecked 5 g oa Displays the current value set for the driver WDT ow Current value ce bee No setting 1 to 32767 29 monitoring time OS Setting value Set the driver WDT monitoring time No setting 1 to 32767 aS Displays the current value of the transient time Transient timeout eae a ee 2 out monitoring time and the setting value to be ow monitoring time Zo entered ie W Displays the current value set for the transient roz Current value a 15 1 to 360 awe time out monitoring time uzg Setting value Set the transient time out monitoring time 15 1 to 360 Okui p Displays the current value of the link refresh cycle zoo Link refresh cycle and the setting value to be entered Displays the current value set for the link refresh ih Current value 15 1 to 1000 Z cycle Z 9 g Setting value Set the link refresh cycle 2 15 1 to 1000 278 qe Reflects the settings and closes the Driver lt 2 E End S 226 setting screen S20 Without reflecting the settings closes the Driver 8 Cancel Z setting screen 1 The current value of the operating link refresh time can be checked on the Board detail information screen 2 The link refresh cycle cannot be set to 5ms or lower when the multiple boards are installed to a single core CPU 5 c e Ss 8 8 8 4 Setting Screen 8 21 8 4 6 Driver
103. D UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 2 2 Single Network System 2 2 2 2 1 Configuration 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 2 2 Setting items In a single network system the following items are to be set when the CC Link IE Controller Network board is used as a control station or a normal station CC Link IE Controller Network board settings are configured in the CC IE Control utility Setting item Control station Normal station Reference Target board specification O O Board O O Channel No O O Network t eee Section 8 4 1 Operational Mage 2 4 Network No O O settin g Group No A A Station No O O LB LW settings A x LX LY settings A x Network Section 8 4 2 Specify reserved range A x 3 station assignment Supplementary A x Section 8 4 5 setting Driver setting A A Section 8 4 6 Event setting A A Section 8 4 7 Target setting A A Section 8 4 8 Refresh parameter setting A A Section 8 4 9 Routing parameter x x Section 8 4 4 O Setting required A Set as necessary X Setting not required 2 2 3 Available device ranges The following device ranges can be used on the CC Link IE Controller Network board Device LB Available range OH to 7FFFH 32768 points LW OH to 1FFFFH 131072 points Remarks The ranges for each CC Link IE Controller Network board and network module need to be assigned in the para
104. E MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK APPLICATION ERROR CODES FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING LIBRARY gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES Appendix 7 New and Improved Functions Appendix 7 1 Change of hardware function The following table shows the new and the improved functions in the CC Link IE Controller Network board First five digits Software version of of the serial number SW1DNC MNETG B Redundant CPU System support 10092 or higher Appendix 1 Network type CC IE Control Extended mode Section 8 4 1 New and improved function 1 05F or later function version D or later 12052 or higher 1 11M or later Appendix 7 2 Update of software package For details of the update version software and the functions which are added or changed please consult your local Mitsubishi representative EIPOINT For the precautions when installing the software package refer to Section 7 1 App 29 Appendix 7 New and Improved Functions Appendix 7 1 Change of hardware function APPENDICES Appendix 8 Restrictions for Operating System 5 The following applicable operating system is not supported by SW1DNC MNETG B with Tia the software version 1 16S or later When using the following operating system install ie SW1DNC MNETG B Version 1 15R 1 Operating system which is not supported by version 1 16S or later 2 Windows 2000 is not supported n
105. FF the personal computer 5 Le ol Install the board Install the board to a slot on a personal computer WW a O re Ww a 12 o H W N z lt iy gaz 300 OOF Wu One Zua ano Fix the board Fix the board to a slot on the personal computer using the board fixing screws i n io Wire the external power supply Se Section 5 4 2 o For the CC Link IE Controller Network board with external power supply function wire the external power supply cable o P a 22 aoa z Power ON Sam z Power ON the personal computer z 2 E 2z 250 6 ae wa 35 5 3 Installation 5 9 5 3 2 Installation environment 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before A WARNING installing the board to or removing it from the personal computer Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the board to fail or malfunction A CAUTION Fix the board by tighten the board fixing screws Tighten the board fixing screws within the specified torque range Undertightening may cause drop of the component short circuit or malfunction Overtightening may damage the screw and or board resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction For the tightening torque of the board fixing screws refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer Before handling the board touch a conducting object such
106. FORE OPERATION MELSEC 5 5 2 H W test This tests the hardware in the CC Link IE Controller Network board a ae W 1 In the Parameter setting screen of the CC IE Control utility set Mode to H W test and click the END button Z Operational setting lt 23 Network type cc IE Control Control station Mode HW test X 4 setting D2 nO Network No 1 Group No 0 Station No 1 z iS m O 2 The following confirmation dialog box appears a CC IE Control utility A Writing parameter and reset Board2 a Is that OK 5 ZA ma 5 Clicking the button executes the H W test Zu Oui z a gaz 3 The result is displayed on Test result field of the Board detail 339 Wz information screen Sea Wo r ano lt Normal completion gt lt Abnormal completion gt Board detail information Board detail information Board type Q80BD J71GP21 SX Board type Q80BDJ71GP21 SX Product information 091220000000000 B Product information 091220000000000 B ad SS E Present Error No error Present Error No error wW O zZ ROM version 2c ROM version 2c E E lt U Link refresh Link refresh own Maximum Minimum Current Maximum Minimum Current timefms 0 0 0 timefms 0 0 0 a WW 0 Test result Test result a g The H w test was normally completed The HAW test was abnormally completed Z 2 lt Oi fe Zd 202 If the test completes abnormally consult your local Mitsubi
107. G Select item Description Reference Checks the cable connection status of the network circuit Circuit test status and parameter setting status of each station from Section 5 5 4 the control station Test between Checks the cable status connected between two stations i Section 5 5 5 station master station OUT to slave station IN 6 1 Parameter Settings Board Information Settings 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC c Network No Set a network number of the network to which the CC Link IE Controller Network board is connected ae 1 Valid setting range gt 1 to 239 2 Precaution Set a same network number to all devices that are connected to the same network lt DZ gt 9O nO wn Zz O lt O L O a d Group No B Set a group number to perform transient transmissions in specified group The group number setting is set on the Parameter setting screen in the CC IE Control utility 1 Valid setting range 2 0 No group setting 5 1 to 32 Group setting is set 5 2 Precaution Only one group number can be set to one station ow Group No 1 Group No 2 roz Sh ge S00 AOE r N G23 aana CPU CPU CPU OF i computer wa 1 I ano Mp1 Ns2 1 Ns3 i Ns4 6 CPU CPU Ns6 CPU Ns8 Ns7 sec Ns5 fr a wo 2 As awn e Station No Set a station n
108. GS fr E 6 3 Network Range Assignment Settings 6 15 6 3 3 Total number of link stations 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 6 3 5 Specifying reserved stations This function is used to reserve stations stations not actually connected but included in the total number of stations to be connected afterward The reserved stations are not recognized as faulty stations Network range assignment 2000 n LB LW settings 1 v 6 16 6 3 Network Range Assignment Settings 6 3 5 Specifying reserved stations 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS 6 4 Equal Assignment Settings This function is used to assign devices automatically in the network range gt The equal assignment settings are set on the Equal assignment screen in the CC IE S ae Control utility CF Section 8 4 3 Equal assignment screen Z O Equal assignment z 20 Identical point assi 16 Poi Cancel wit entical point assignment oints Cancel z C Equal assignment as LB LW settings 1 r LB equal assignment r LW equal assignment Start station Station Start station Station 7 End station Station End station Station a Start No Start No S Total points assigned Total points assigned 3 D The following shows the two types of equal assignment ep Zz Assignment 3y 2 Description O method 4 e Equal assignment of LB LW The specified link device range can be equally assigned to the send ranges of the relevant stations or E
109. ICES i CELSE ao b Using Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 e zZ Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 fej OF 1 Open Control Panel Be A Getting Started a gt Connect to a Projector cal Calculator A Sticky Notes ge Q Snipping Tool S gt Gh PS Viewer g es Windows Fax and Scan D a So E Remote Desktop Connection e Magnifier Help and Support gt All Programs Search programs and files P Shutdown 2 Select System and Security E gt Control Panel 44 Scorch Conve Panel P Adjust your computer s settings View by Category 7 a PROGRAMMING a System and Security Revie Back jecurit ers status __ Network and Internet BBW neato nememet EE ieu neton sane ma tks Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods A Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual j display APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 3 Select Change User Account Control settings ni a gt Control Panel System and Security gt 44 Search Control Panel p a ie 2 Action Center enna ea g oe W Clock Language and Region Windows Update mie te zZ E Backup and Restore 5 Back u imputer Restore files from backup O T N W a Y J 4 Set the slide bar Never notify and click the OK button A Choose when to be notified ab
110. IE Controller Network module lt CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual b When normal connection information has not been obtained The disconnected station is displayed on the IN side of the connected station 6 7 8 4 1Connected 2 3 5 P P F 0 44 _ _10 4 Present Control Assign Control 8 32 8 5 Diagnostics Screen 8 5 1 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 4 Select station network device status display Displays detailed information of the selected station For modules For boards ation No Group No 0 Mode Online Station No 1 Group No 0 Mode Online CEL Aisi seek ci C Network typerCe IE Control zz O E 2 aD 26 Do n Item Description Display content E Group No Displays a group number of the selected station 0 to 32 lt Online i Offline a H W test Mode Displays the mode of the selected station Self loopback test Circuit test Test between station D Network t Displays the network t tly set ee etwor isplays the networl e currently set E ue oe vm CC IE Control Extended mode 2 Normal operation Operating status Operation error data link continued yellow S O Operation error data link discontinued red 5 c a O W 3 ZO Select station network ae i 1a Refer to 5 in this section Qg device status LED display is Data linking za s
111. ION OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS op fr a wo 2 As awn INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING CC IE Control UTILITY SOFTWARE PACKAGES 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 6 9 Target Settings This function is used to set logical numbers for accessing the multiple CPU system or redundant CPU system The target settings are set on the Target setting screen in the CC IE Control utility Section 8 4 8 Target setting screen 1 Setting example when accessing the multiple CPU system CPU No 2 CPU No 1 CC Link IE Controller Network module Multiple CPU controlled by CPU No 2 Station No 1 Setting the CPU No 1 of multiple CPU system Target setting Target setting Logical Network Station station No No No CC Link IE Controller Network Network No 1 Station No 2 2 Setting example when accessing the redundant CPU system CC Link IE Controller Network module LStation No 4 MELSECNETI H module Station No 5 Setting the control system of redundant CPU system Target setting Target setting ce IE Controller Network Network No 2 MELSECNET H Network No 1 Station No 3 HE ES b Control system
112. Is the ERR LED ON Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Was the status YES improved by replacing the personal computer End Was the status improved by replacing the CC Link IE YES Controller Network board End Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 14 24 14 4 Flowchart when Data Link Failed 14 4 6 Flowchart when RUN LED is flashing 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 5 Flowchart for Error during Data Link x z This section explains actions for an error during data link WW gt gt a Me 14 5 1 Flowchart when specific link device is not updated to the expected value Check the followings z Qe 1 Check for link faulty station with the network monitor of the Diagnostics E function 2 Check the parameter assignment range at the control station 3 z 3 Check the device range used in the sequence program at the z programmable controller O B 4 Check argument data of the communication function accessing the specific link device in the user program o z OF O a5 tu LGOTA ONE Y ERROR CODES APPENDICES INDEX 14 5 Flowchart for Error during Data Link 1 4 25 14 5 1 Flowchart when specific link device is not updated to the expected value 4 TROUBLESHOOTING MELS 14 5 2 Flowchart when data cannot be written or read with user program Is the return value of the communication function abnormal YES K Chapter 1
113. MELSECPowerManager The following is a setting example when using Windows 7 _ Appearance and Personalization Network and Internet Ry Changethetheme BaD connects tne Change desktop background SSE View network status and tasks jus resolution Choose hemegroup and sharing options 7 Hardware and Sound Addad Ease of Access Programs Le Windows suggest senings Optimize visual display Uninstall a program 2 Select Administrative Tools Tis search Contat Pant User Accounts and Family Safety ed Check the Windows Experience index pe A aan e ofthis computer P Device Manager ariii R Windows Update lect Language and Regien Turn automatic updating on croft Checkforupdates View installed updates Ease of Access gt Power Options Require a password when the computer wakes Change what the power buttons do Change when the computer sleeps fa Backup and Restore Back up your computer Restore fles from backup PE z A P dive Crente and format hard disk partitions 3 Double click Services Date modified Type 73 2000 957 PM Shortcut 73 2009 3 54PM Shortcut Data Sources ODBC 7 13 2003 9 53 PM Shortcut Bl Event Viewer 7 13 2000 54 BM Shortcut scatter TA3 2009 954 PM Shortcut Ba Local Security Policy THAGIO11 230PM Shortcut 771372008233 PM Shortcut 11 18 2011 230 PM Shortcut 7A3 200 954 PM Shortcut 7A3 20099 53 PM Shortcut 7 13 2009934 PM Shortcut Windows Firewall with Advanced Secusty 7 13
114. No 3 gt gt Network No 8 Network No 9 source Possible iB O Possible by setting the routing parameters a x Not possible a lt 1 The transient transmission is possible by specifying a network module close to the request source of the same programmable controller x lt W Q z 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 1 2 5 12 1 1 Communication function 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 12 1 2 Routing function The routing function allows the transient transmission to a station located on another network number in a multiple network system In order to execute the routing function it is necessary to set the routing parameters to associate the network number of the request source and the station that functions as a relay station The following is the precautions on setting routing parameters 1 Transient transmission range Communication can be made with a station on the eighth farthest network system No of relay stations 7 2 Access conditions when the station number of request source request target or relay station of the CC Link IE Controller Network is 65 or higher 1 When the station number of the request source or request target is 65 or higher Accessible with the following conditions The request source and request target are the Universal model QCPUs or CC Link IE Controller Network board e The relay station of the CC Link IE Controller Network is the Universal model QCPU Relay stat
115. O The RUN LED has turned OFF since power ON a even during communications y lt with other stations A BS N Did the RUN LED turn ad ON after replacing the CC Link IE YES gs Controller Network board End oO Z Check the hardware of the personal ee g computer 2 Are communications with other E stations continued NO The RUN z LED turned OFF during E YES communications The RUN LED on the CC Link IE Controller Network board is failure Replace it 5 2z lt O Or O mz S ctu n w A O O ne E az w o z e e 2 WwW z a gt fe a n w Q Q z2 w a a lt x lt i a zZ 14 4 Flowchart when Data Link Failed 14 17 14 4 1 Flowchart when RUN LED is OFF 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 4 2 Flowchart when SD RD LEDs are OFF An error occurred YES Is the ERR LED ON Does the parameter set to the control station correct NO NO Did the SD LED turn ON Turn ON OFF B X and Y assigned to the own station on the personal computer Monitor B X and Y from other stations Do B X and Y turn ON OFF at other stations Replace the CC Link IE Controller Network board installed to the personal computer Section 14 4 3 Flowchart when ERR LED turned ON Review the parameter setting Did the RD LED turn ON NO y YES Turn OFF B X and Y used in the perso
116. PET EEEE App 23 Appendix 4 3 Comparison of device monitor utilities SSAC aaa We ae anne eS eae suse Sanwa App a 23 Appendix 4 4 Precautions for replacing programs ae asa Utes panna warn aaah a Sfareea acute auecniie wretawaveuupate aph warate aad ayaa App 2 24 Appendix 45 Precautions for setting parameters eal a cevaiger au at paimise aan nigh wRT a aaa ania ata ga uk WORK po mcmna UarinualGaLEe ah AT a Ave atm Ruana Lenadeomy App 24 Appendix 4 6 Comparison of the data link library functions oee eetere nnee App 25 Appendix 5 Combinations with Existing Software anal aac aivalacate yi Gua sli Gael asa qoala atahein Aone AY acai ace acavahaqa sun ausa AYaxal wasp oaum Suny aye aueha al acetals App 26 Appendix 6 Checking Serial Number and Function Version ar Sarge ies om aviaceyarenaaa a ar nesqualava ie aga alin asal aces acalataua sania aecacasaie araa App 27 Appendix 7 New and Improved Functions ERE ERE rere eee cree re ere hear Ree ee cee ere ene mre Ree eee eo App 29 Appendix 7 1 Change of hardware function CCRC eer Cee e Cece TETEE eee ee rr eee rr ere ee er a App 2 29 Appendix 7 2 Update of software package Terr itr rer re ee ee Tee eC ee er ee eer ee ear he App ne 29 Appendix 8 Restrictions for Operating System ie ica a ay a Ga ca Sa aw aaa a LETTET ETET a ae a8 a App 30 Appendix 9 Warning Message Appears on Windows i vst neni at ayac hid jack vm ntadasbi cravat mia ava jacn ioe jaceiacai ao niatace arate vay alevtckieralnrnc
117. PU specification When the system control system standby system system A system B of the Redundant CPU is specified to access the Redundant CPU the Logical station No set on the Target setting screen of the CC IE Control utility is used for access For the Logical station No setting refer to the following section Section 8 4 8 Target setting screen Target setting Target setting i i i a dl Pe a o o ooo o ooo o Oooo o o ooo ooo o ooo Doo EA EE EA FA aga EA EA E zan ETE ETA EEN EEE Ea ETS EA POINT When a CC Link IE Controller Network board with a serial number whose first five digits are 10091 or lower or an SW1DNC MNETG B with the software version 1 04E or earlier is used the redundant CPU system cannot be accessed directly with the CC Link IE Controller Network interface board Relay the MELSECNET H network system to access the redundant CPU system App P Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System APPENDICES oc 7 O 2 Operation at occurrence of system switching 5 When system switching occurs during access to the Redundant CPU access to the g 5 W gt Redundant CPU set for the Logical station No is continued s5 Example When the following Logical st
118. RAMETER SETTINGS INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 5 5 Test 5 17 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC 5 5 1 Bus I F test This test checks the hardware of the Bus I F function of the CC Link IE Controller Network board 1 In the Parameter setting screen of the CC IE Control utility set Mode to Bus I F test and click the END button Operational setting Network type CCIE Control Control station Mode Bus F test I seting Network No 1 Group No Station No 1 2 The following confirmation dialog box appears CC IE Control utility A Writing parameter and reset Board2 Is that OK Clicking the button executes the bus I F test 3 The result is displayed on Test result field of the Board detail information screen lt Normal completion gt lt Abnormal completion gt Board type Ea Board type Product information Product information Present Error Present Error ROM version ROM version Link refresh Link refresh Maximum Minimum Current Maximum Minimum Current timers mem Test result Test result The bus I F test was normally completed The bus I F test was abnormally completed No 3014672 0x00000000h If the test completes abnormally consult your local Mitsubishi representative 5 418 5 5 Test 5 5 1 Bus I F test 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BE
119. Requirements for Conformance to Low Voltage Directive eenen App 48 Appendix 13 External Dimensions eee eee eee eee eee eee ee ee cere eee eee eee eee ee eee eee App 49 Appendix 13 1 Q80BD J71GP21 SX eee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee ere App is 49 Appendix 13 2 Q80BD J71GP21S SX eee eee eee ee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee ee eee eee ee App 50 Appendix 13 3 Q81BD J71GP21 SX eee eee cere eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee ee ee eee App m 51 Appendix 13 4 Q81BD J71GP21S SX eee eee eee eee ee ee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee eee ee App 52 INDEX Index 1 to Index 2 A 19 MANUAL The following is the manual relevant to this product Please purchase it if necessary Relevant Manual Manual Number Manual Name Model Code MELSEC Q CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual This manual explains the system configuration performance specification functions handling and wiring instructions and troubleshooting of the CC Link IE Controller Network Sold separately MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual This manual explains the programming function specifications and sample programming of the MELSEC data link library Sold separately SH 080668ENG 13JV16 SH 081035ENG 13JV25 MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual is stored on the CD ROM of software package with PDF file Manuals in printed form are
120. S INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 2 3 Multi Network System 2 4 2 3 1 Configuration 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 3 2 Setting items In a multi network system the following items are to be set when the CC Link IE Controller Network board is used as a control station or a normal station CC Link IE Controller Network board settings are configured in the CC IE Control utility Setting item Control station Normal station Reference Target board specification O O Board O O Channel No O O Network t Sees z Section 8 4 1 Operational Mogg a o Network No O O settin 9 Group No A A Station No O O LB LW settings A x LX LY settings A x Network Section 8 4 2 Specify reserved range i A x 3 station assignment Supplementary A x Section 8 4 5 setting Driver setting A A Section 8 4 6 Event setting A A Section 8 4 7 Target setting A A Section 8 4 8 Refresh parameter setting A A Section 8 4 9 Routing parameter A A Section 8 4 4 O Setting required A Setasnecessary X Setting not required 2 3 3 Available device range The same device ranges as those of a single network system can be used Section 2 2 3 Available device ranges 2 5 2 3 Multi Network System 2 3 2 Setting items 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 4 Use in Multiple CPU System or Redundant CPU System To access a multiple CPU syst
121. SB with the monitor function controller x zZ P NO Has data link normally YES o gt recovered H Ls 2p D 25 Is the station number NO Brid correctly set 0 YES Is the faulty station a NO zZ personal computer O x CC IE Control utility User program Set the correct station Power OFF the programmable number with the 3 controller set the correct CC IE Control utility and Review the user program station number and then reset the board power it ON Z On 2z z OF S mz lt i le NO Has data link normally YES recovered Y Check the faulty station using self loopback test End D w A O Does an error exist YES K w Replace the CC Link IE Controller 4 NO Network board or network module installed mounted to the faulty station 2 Q 0 i le NO Has data link normally YES a recovered 5 4 fe Check the link cables connected to the faulty station using station to station test End Y Replace the faulty link cable n w Q Q z w Has data link normally Please consult your local Mitsubishi GT recovered representative End x lt i a zZ 14 4 Flowchart when Data Link Failed 14 23 14 4 5 Flowchart when data link to specific station is disabled 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 4 6 Flowchart when RUN LED is flashing An error occurred YES Is the RUN LED ON Section 14 7 Actions for WDT Error NO
122. Section 12 3 3 Section 12 3 4 Section 12 9 Section 16 2 Section 16 4 5 Appendix 3 1 Appendix 3 2 Deletion Section 12 3 5 Section 12 3 6 Section 1 3 is changed to Appendix 4 Appendix 4 is changed to Appendix 7 Correction Section 2 6 Dec 2010 SH NA 080691ENG k Correction Section 2 5 A 10 Print Date Jul 2011 Jan 2012 Mar 2012 Dec 2012 Manual Number SH NA 080691ENG L SH NA 080691ENG M SH NA 080691ENG N SH NA 080691ENG O Revision Model addition Q81BD J71GP21 SX Q81BD J71GP21S SX Addition Appendix 9 3 Appendix 9 4 Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS FOR USE INTRODUCTION MANUAL HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS PACKING LIST CHAPTER 1 Section 1 1 Section 1 2 Section 2 1 Section 2 4 Section 2 5 Section 3 1 Section 3 2 Section 5 1 1 Section 6 1 Section 6 2 1 Section 6 3 Section 6 4 1 Section 6 4 2 Section 6 5 3 Section 6 6 1 Section 6 6 2 Section 7 9 Section 8 1 1 Section 8 1 2 Section 8 1 3 Section 9 2 1 Section 9 3 3 Section 9 4 1 Section 9 4 8 Section 10 2 1 Section 10 6 Section 10 7 Section 10 8 Section 10 9 CHAPTER 11 Section 11 2 Section 12 2 Section 13 1 4 Section 13 2 CHAPTER 14 Section 14 1 Section 14 2 Section 15 2 Section 15 3 Section 15 3 1 Section 15 4 2 Section 15 4 4 Section 15 4 5 Section 15 5 1 Section 15 6 Appendix
123. SendEx function Two execution types arrival acknowledgment and no arrival acknowledgment are available for the SEND function When sending data with no arrival acknowledgment execution type all stations in group numbers can be specified as target stations Heer CPU module Target station Channel 1 Channel 2 A Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Board Driver User application main mdOpen 151 1 amp path mdSendEx path 1 1 nae mdClose path Es POINT 1 An error occurs when data are sent to the same channel which is being used CPU module HH Target station Channel 1 Channel 2 Board Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 8 Driver User application main mdOpen 151 1 amp path mdSendEx path 1 1 mdClose path 2 Only an even number byte can be specified for a send data size 3 Logical station numbers cannot be specified 4 Even if the process of data send is completed normally with arrival acknowledgment execution type data may not be r
124. Start Points Start Points 1 no Zz O q o me O W ja N Specify reserved station Equal assignment Supplementary setting Clear Cancel ep Zz O Item Description Default Setting range S 7 Set the number of total stations including a A Total stations S 2 2 to 120 control station within the target network Select the device assignment method of Points Start w Assignment method Start End z network assignment range Start End O LB LW setting 1 6 A Select link devices that are used to set the i LB LW setting 2 or Switch screens LB LW setting 1 arg network assignment ranges LX LY setting 1 Q LX LY setting 2 u 4 Set points of link devices that are assigned to 3 Points No setting Range indicated by the target stations aw Sian Set the start numbers of the link devices that N ii aby as a o settin indi are assigned to the target stations ange Indicated by ao 4 Set the end numbers of the link devices that 3 Zs End f i No setting Range indicated by OF m are assigned to the target stations oe WO Monitoring time Set the monitoring time of link scan time 2000 5 to 2000 Set the selected station as an I O master F A 9 station of link devices LX LY or cancel it g Specify 1Olmaster station Select a line and each click switches set and Z o lt cS cancel Za we Set the selected station as a reserved station 28 E pZ Specify reserved station or cancel it Select a line and each click
125. TOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK APPLICATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING LIBRARY ERROR CODES gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES TT CELSE 2 Access examples of path switching The following shows examples of path switching during access to the control system lt When system switching occurs due to communication error gt CC Link IE Controller Network module MELSECNET H module Control system Standby system Connection to the control system Personal computer CC Link IE Controller Network board Tracking cable CC Link IE Controller Network module MELSECNETI H module CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNET H YY Connection to the Standby system ji 1 Control system control system ll ll e Er E Personal computer i Tracking cable CC Link IE Controller E E Network board Figure 1 Path switching example 1 App 7 Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System APPENDICES lt When system switching occurs due to standby system error gt CC Link IE Controller Network module MELSECNET H module MELSECNET H J E pe Standby syst m emor CC Link IE Controller Network
126. Test result field of the Board detail information screen lt Normal executing gt lt Abnormal completion gt Board detail information tad Board detail information Board type as0BDJ7IGP2ISSx Board type Qs0BDJ7IGP2ISSx Product information fizos20000000000 D Product information fiz0s200000000000 Present Error Noewr Present Error Noe SCS ROM version Os ROM version a7 Link refresh Link refresh Maximum Minimum Current Maximum Minimum Current timefms aa E wt timefms o uy joy Test result r Test result Executing the Test between station normally The Test between station was abnormally completed Memory Test Memory Test If the above display remains for about 10 seconds the result is normal If the test completes abnormally the cable used for the station to station test is faulty Replace the cable 5 26 5 5 Test 5 5 5 Station to station test 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC 5 5 6 Communication test ai s r Sak Communication test is a test to check whether the transient transmission can be routed u correctly between the own station and specified communication target i Note that however this test cannot be used during the circuit test 9 The following explains the procedure for a communication test 6 1 Click the Communication test button on the CC Link IE Controller Network 5 diagnostics result screen of the
127. UBLESHOOTING MELSEC When the Found New Hardware Wizard screen is not displayed automatically after the board installation update the driver on the Device Manager screen Computer Management Sy File Action View Window Help gt on ss n a Ra 5 Sr Network Controller and select Update Driver Software a s eo 1 Open the Windows Device Manager screen Right click on Scan for hardware changes Properties 2 Click Install from a list or specific location Advanced Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for Network Controller IF your hardware came with an installation CD Q or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do O Install the software automatically Recommended install irom a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue Cancel aT Ra RT TT 3 Insert the CD ROM of the software package to the CD ROM drive Please choose your search and installation options 4 Select Search for the best driver in these locations lt For 32 bit version operating system 1 gt Search for the best driver in these locations i tng Ac ee Sa pe CTE MN Check Include this location in the search and specify Drivers x86 paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed T of the CD ROM drive to be used V Include this location in the search DADiverswes
128. URATION SYSTEM A SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION PARAMETER SETTINGS INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 4 FUNCTIONS 4 3 Driver WDT function Driver WDT function monitors the operation of the software operating system driver inside the hardware by the timer function on CC Link IE Controller Network board When the driver cannot reset the timer of the board within the specified driver WDT monitoring time CC Link IE Controller Network board detects driver WDT error Driver WDT function detects driver operation delay due to the access error from the driver to CC Link IE Controller Network board or system high load 1 Driver WDT settings For the setting methods refer to the following section Section 8 4 6 Driver setting screen The driver WDT function is set to invalid as a default 2 When the driver WDT error has occurred The following shows the operation when driver WDT error has occurred a CC Link IE Controller Network board and the driver stop communication and are disconnected from the network in order to avoid an erroneous output b RUN LED flicks and RD LED turns ON on the CC Link IE Controller Network board c 28158 9202H Driver WDT error occurs when accessing CC Link IE Controller Network board from the application program in which the CC IE Control utility and MELSEC data link library function
129. Value specified in standard EN61000 4 2 ic di i TE An elecirostati discharge is 8KV Air discharge Electrostatic discharge applied to the enclosure of the a e 4kV Contact discharge immunity equipment EN61000 4 3 80 AM modulation 1kHz Radiated radio frequency An electric field is radiated to the 80M to 1000MHz 10V m electromagnetic field product e 1 4G to 2 0GHz 3V m immunity 4 2 0G to 2 7GHz 1V m e AC DC power I O power and AC I O EN61000 4 4 asd Wine ok Fast transient burst eur noise is applied to power unshielded lines i o lines and signal lines DC I O analog and communication lines immunity 1kV e AC power AC I O power and AC I O EN61131 2 unshielded lines 2kV CM 1kV DM 2007 EN61000 4 5 Lightning surge is applied to e DC power and DC I O power lines 0 5kV Surge immunity 1 power lines and signal lines CM 0 5kV DM e DC I O AC I O shielded analog and communication lines 1kV CM EN61000 4 6 High frequency noise is applied 0 15M to 80MHz 80 AM modulation 1kHz Conducted RF immunity 1 to power lines and signal lines 10Vrms EN61000 4 8 The product is immersed in the Power frequency magnetic field of an induction 50 60Hz 30A m magnetic field immunity 1 coil 0 0 5 period starting at zerocrossing Paapin i i 0 250 300 period 50 60H Voltage dips and Power voltage is momentarily 0 period Z F ee a interrupted e 40 10 12 period 50 60Hz interruption immunity i
130. a O a 1 2 3 A B 7 0 Cancel OK H fe az if a z 3 The value is input in the field z Data Changing Device W 0001 2 9 C HEX DEC 20 S 2 mie z cance is Q Z 9 10 Numerical Pad 9 12 1 0 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEG CHAPTER 10 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 10 1 This chapter explains the features of the functions provided by the library The functions are used when creating a user program that communicates with a programmable controller CPU With these functions a user can communicate without being aware of hardware types or communication protocols on the target 1 O MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY MELSEC The following table shows the list of the functions in the MELSEC data link library that is provided with the software package 10 2 oc O E fe Function name Description OF mdOpen Opens a communication line i E mdClose Closes a communication line 4 0 Batch writes devices Extended function mdSendEx z Sends data SEND function 1 Extended function 2 2 Batch reads devices Extended function z mdReceiveEx a Receives data RECV function Extended function 2 D mdRandWEx Writes devices randomly Extended function mdRandREx Reads devices randomly Extended function mdDevSetEx Sets a bit device Extended function 2 mdDevRstEx Resets a bit de
131. acting pin and cable in the grooves of the crimp tool squeeze the handle and make them stick together tightly For details of the crimp refer to the instruction of the tool A strip length of the cable should be 5 to 7 mm 1 5 to 2 7 in b Check for a crimp Check if the cable including a part of the sheath is evenly crimped to the contacting pin If the cable part is crimped but not the sheath part or the cable is stuck out the cable cut or a malfunction may result Contacting pin Cable c Connecting to the connector According to the following pin out fully Connector insert the crimped cable to the connector until a click is heard Contacting pin Pin No Description 1 24V 2 24G N 24G 3 Open 4 Connecting external power supply cable to the board Properly insert the wired external power supply cable to the external power supply cable connector of the CC Link IE Controller Network board until a click is heard Keep the cable away from the main circuit cable power cables and or the load cables for any other than programmable controllers Ensure a distance of 100 mm 3 94 in between them Es POINT Be sure to twist the external power supply cable 5 416 5 4 Wiring 5 4 2 Wiring external power supply cable 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 5 5 Test Before executing data link check the CC Link IE Controller Network board and cable
132. ad been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special dam
133. ages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows XP Windows Server Visual Basic and Visual C Visual Studio are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Oracle and Java are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates Other company names and product names used in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective companies SPREAD Copyright C 1999 by FarPoint Technologies Inc SH NA 080691ENG S 1504 KWIX MODEL SW1 MNETG B U E MODEL CODE 13JZ02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
134. ailed e Set the network parameters correctly e Restart the CC IE Control utility e The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B Retrieval of link status of the connecting station failed e Set the network parameters correctly e Restart the CC IE Control utility e The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B Retrieval of station type of the connecting station failed e Set the network parameters correctly e Restart the CC IE Control utility The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B Retrieval of link status after executing link operation START STOP failed e Set the network parameters correctly Restart the CC IE Control utility e The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B Network No value in connected station is incorrect Set the network number correctly Group No value in connected station is incorrect Set the group number correctly Station No value in connected station is incorrect 13 9 Set the station number correctly 13 1 List of Error Messages in CC IE Control Utility 13 1 3 Error messages displayed on the diagnostics screen 1 3 ERROR CODES 4 Logging screen Error message Corrective action The item to clear is not selected After selecting the item execute it again Select the item to be cleared Unexp
135. andard is used troubles caused by failures such as a contact failure or operation error may occur For details of the number of boards that can be installed installation slots and occupied slots refer to the performance specifications in gt Section 3 2 b Added operating environment Operating environment Supported version of SW1DNC MNETG B Multiprocessor Version 1 05F or later 2 Instructions for operating system a Supported version of SW1DNC MNETG B Supported version of SW1DNC MNETG B Q80BD J71GP21 SX Q81BD J71GP21 SX Q80BD J71GP21S SX Q81BD J71GP21S SX Operating system Windows 2000 1 15R or earlier Not supported Windows XP All versions Windows Server 2003 R2 32 bit version Windows Server 2003 R2 64 bit version Version 1 12N or later Windows Vista Version 1 02C or later Windows Server 2008 32 bit version Version 1 11M or later Version 1 12N or later Windows Server 2008 64 bit version Windows Server 2008 R2 Version 1 12N or later Windows 7 32 bit version Version 1 11M or later Windows 7 64 bit version Version 1 12N or later i Windows Saivel ee 1 16S or later 1 16S or later Windows 8 i Aione Severe Aa RA 1 17T or later 1 17T or later Windows 8 1 b User authority Log on as a user having administrator authority e Installation uninstallation and usage of utilities are available only by the administra
136. ansmission Z a Normally communicating stations hold the data received from a communication 2 error station or a communication stop station E ae b A communication stop station holds the data received from other stations 0 2 nO Example When a communication error occurred in 1Ns2 due to cable disconnection D Zz Disconnected Communication error station 2 1Me1 1Ns2 2 8 S a N gt lt 1Ns3 Disconnected IL Link data status after disconnection FUNCTIONS Link data PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 1Ns3 i i 4Ns2 i i i i fencer ane Area in which link data are held PARAMETER SETTINGS 4 SB SW status when a communication error station communication stop station occurs The status of whether there are any communication error stop stations on the network can be checked with the link special relay register SB SW Use the link special relay and link special register shown in the following lt Section 11 1 1 Interlock related signals For interlock program examples refer to the following manual K3 CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 4 2 Specifications on Cyclic Transmission Processing 4 4 4 2 1 Cyclic transmission processing 4 FUNCTIONS 5 Link refresh The link refresh is executed between the refresh data storage area and the driver buff
137. are applicable 2 e 5V slot 2 e 3 3 V slot e 64 bit slot D PCI X slot b Q81BD J71GP21 SX Q81BD J71GP21S SX PCI Express is applicable 3 Operation is easy F To utilize the CC Link IE Controller Network board just install it to a personal 5 computer and install the software package Using the CC IE Control utility various settings such as channel numbers and station numbers can be configured easily PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION PARAMETER SETTINGS INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 1 2 Features 1 2 1 1 3 OVERVIEW MELSEC 4 External power supply allows continuous network communication even during power off of personal computer Function of the CC Link IE Controller Network board with external power supply function Since power is supplied externally the CC Link IE Controller Network board with external power supply function can continue network communication baton passing even if a personal computer is powered off and data link cannot be performed Therefore a normally operating station connected between other stations with power off computers will not be disconnected from the data link Another advantage is that the link scan time is stabilized since loopback can be also prevented Control station No 1 Normal station No 2 Normal station N
138. are package is enabled When the installation is completed normally the manual of MELSEC data link library is registered in the MELSEC folder as the same folder as the utility Es POINT e In order to view the manuals Adobe Reader is required Adobe Reader can be downloaded from the Adobe Systems Incorporated web site duct e When using 64 bit version operating system the icon may not be displayed even when Adobe Reader is installed Software package Version Manual name SWODNC MNETH B 22Y or earlier MELSEC Data Link Function HELP 23Z or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 2 SW1DNC CCBD2 B 1 10L or earlier MELSEC Data Link Function HELP 1 11M or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual SW1DNC MNETG B 1 11M orearlier MELSEC Data Link Function HELP 1 12N or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 4 SW1DNC CCIEF B 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 Installation 1 00A MELSEC Data Link Library Programmer s Reference 1 02C or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual gt Depending on other installed software packages the manuals shown above may also be displayed In this case refer to the following manual LA MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Board is displayed as the icon name when using SWODNC MNETH B Version 27D or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manua
139. are used IPOINT e When the multiple applications in which MELSEC data link library is used are executed driver WDT error is returned to all the programs However only the CC Link IE Controller Network board in which the driver WDT error has occurred is recognized as an error station on the network When using driver WDT function set the monitoring timer considering the margin of the personal computer load e For the troubleshooting refer to the following chapter Chapter 14 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 3 Driver WDT function 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC OPERATION w wi 3 This chapter explains the procedures and settings before operating the CC Link IE Controller Network board 6 5 1 Procedure before Operation 5 o The following flowchart explains the procedure before operating the CC Link IE Controller gt 9 Network board 2 Vv Check 5 Install the software package on a personal computer Vv Install the board Section 5 3 3 2 Install the board to a slot on a personal computer For the CC Link IE Controller Network board with external power supply Section 5 4 2 2 function wire the external power supply cable 2 Vv Set the channel number Section 5 3 4 5 aw za lt O an Set the channel number and confirm it with the utility woz 5v0 ofa Orw W Q Check the board S KF Section 5 5 Test the hardware of the installed board oa Wire
140. as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the board to fail or malfunction Install the board to a personal computer which is compliant with PCI standard or PCI Express standard gt Section 2 5 Operating Environment Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction Securely insert the board into the PCI slot following the board installation instruction of the personal computer Incorrect insertion of the board may lead to a malfunction failure or drop of the board When installing the board take care not to get injured by an implemented component or a surrounding member 5 3 4 Setting Channel Numbers Channel number is set per board and used to identify the board The channel number can be set within the range of 151 to 154 Channel numbers being set are used to specify the target boards in setting parameters and performing the MELSEC data link library function 1 Setting method Channel No is assigned to the CC Link IE Controller network board installed in a personal computer in order of PCI slot number automatically The desired channel No can be assigned on the Parameter setting screen K Section 8 4 1 of CC IE Control utility Section 6 1 5 10 5 3 Installation 5 3 4 Setting Channel Numbers 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 5 4 Wiring if This section explains precautions for connecting cables to the C
141. asa ninface App 31 Appendix 9 1 Overview of warning message asa ai pins atacnda ance inwesaiet et nia cat nt sinc oudnte ievaJava utntu ataracedevs jaceiacelass nan cerai aiave avndavadevadats arnue a App a 31 Appendix 9 2 Methods for preventing the warning message TETEE TETE ETEETETETET ETETETT EEEEETETETETETT App es 32 Appendix 10 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup App 38 A 18 Appendix 10 1 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode standby hibernate ssstrrscre terete tte eee eee ener e terete tenes App 38 Appendix 10 2 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee App 40 Appendix 10 3 Behavior when the fast startup function is enabled ss teertereteeeee teres App 41 Appendix 11 MELSECPowerManager eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee er ere ey App 42 Appendix 11 1 Installing MELSECPowerManager Wee eee eee App 42 Appendix 11 2 Uninstalling MELSECPowerManager eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee App 42 Appendix 11 3 Checking MELSECPowerManager eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee App 43 Appendix 12 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee ee App 45 Appendix 12 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive s ssrerrrrrere treet teres ness App 45 Appendix 12 2
142. ation No 66 was specified for access we Logical station No 66 Network No 1 4 Station No 1 z Multiple PLC Not specified Redundant PLC Control system A me P lt Before system switching ot oe Station No 4 25 CC Link IE Controller Network module MELSECNET H module Station No 5 Z z CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNET H Network No 2 Network No 1 A B Control system m ma Standby system Station No 3 Tracking cable Z Og Station No 1 Station No 2 T 6 3E After system switching a Z Station No 4 Zr CC Link IE Controller Network module MELSECNET H module Station No 5 N W Q O O a CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNET H O Network No 2 Network No 1 E W Control system ma H s Standby system Z HoT XS 6 Standby system Control system Z Tracking cable 8 a5 Station No 1 Station No 2 n a mi O x APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System App 2 APPENDICES 4 POINT To check which system in the Redundant CPU system is being accessed by the CC Link IE Controller Network board create a program to monitor the following special relays 1 When checking which system is being accessed System A or System B e Identifies System A System B o
143. ay occur for the circuit control period Normal value 50ms Worst value 100ms If the all station error occurs an error is detected in the communication status baton pass status and the data link status cyclic transmission status of all station 5 Since the board is reset during the driver operation a brief loopback occur An error is also detected in the communication status baton pass status and the data link status cyclic transmission status 6 The circuit control period is a period to reconstruct the data link when the CC Link IE Controller Network board is reconnected disconnected such as when the cable is disconnected or the power is turned from OFF to ON App 15 Appendix 2 Network Status at Power ON OFF and Board Reset During Data Linking Appendix 2 2 Network status at board reset APPENDICES Appendix 3 File Output 5 zZ This section explains files to be saved in the CC IE Control utility W gt Appendix 3 1 Parameter file se The default directory for the storage location load source of files to be used in the CC IE Z Control utility is install directory MNETG PARAM The default for the file name of z dialog box displayed during saving is blank 2 N mE Parameters set by the current CC IE Control utility are saved in the file of the development za environment personal computer when the Save file button is clicked on the Parameter setting screen 3 z
144. ce Manual SEND RECV function CF Section 12 1 4 SEND RECV function n L Event Setting Function sesessesesseseeseeeeeeeseeeeseseeseceeseoseseeseeseeseeeeseeeeseseee Section 12 2 Event Setting Function A O oO a O a pe ui oO Z Q O E aal Ww all faa O a ke n mn O Q Zz i a a lt x lt fi Q Z 12 1 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 12 1 Transient Transmission Function This function performs data communication with other station s programmable controller when a request is made from the MELSEC Data Link Library K5 Chapter 10 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY Communication can be made with programmable controllers on the same or other networks An access to other stations from the CC Link IE Controller Network Device Monitor Utility is performed in transient transmission In the CC Link IE Controller Network data communication can be performed with other stations on the same network where the own station is connected as well as with stations on other networks Note that the specification range of the target station number differs depending on the CPU module of the own station Own station request source Target station Universal model QCPU High Performance model QCPU LCPU RCPU Station No 1 to 64 O O Station No 65 to 120 O x O Available x N A 1 When the own station is in multiple CPU system it can access the station numbers 65 to 120 via the CC Link IE Con
145. ch Monitor Function EET Creer eee eee E ETETETT EEEE TETELE re Sree e eee err 9 3 9 4 Setting the 16 point Register Monitor Function ej slew cal cya aegis nual ayhrialey ives alas wince Rdeoaye ale wa eat a Ala age mama aval qc a a al apainl aaaravenaue weal aravnca 9 4 9 5 Setting a Monitor Target Saab wp wm my a ne fae Paar ww waa ra ai oan a Se fo ua re area wim ware ware 9 5 96 Setting a Device to be Monitored avatar Gactarsca tava tun fataliane hni aretatafachia Sin ieindeua dein Gruvutatacsi asaceiain dans incwn svasninceiatastiace iene ialaiaveiataCarsvatutecntalansiinteiactraiate 9 6 9 7 Changing Word Device Double Word Device Values Br asaFauus anv nun aoa cms aay a7 ETETETT TETELE ETETETT TETTEY 9 7 9 8 Tuning Bit Devices ON and OFF ca ar it fGen myname mae aa Mul Sur s or Sigua whe Cav vimn ifarG tny wan aaa ay ater uta eiucah ayes ayaa ogee wae siayulelacayare 9 9 9 9 Switching a Display Format natin ua ianin min a mtacanva iavnucnsinvajavnbaiacainiatavatauu aca favajaiavarnetavatncnsa spuce tavavainiacatasnintnia etacace devn jan iavajacatarncasala ecacalnsaceiacagainta 9 zs 11 9 10 Numerical Pad eee Cee ee eee re ee eee rai ee eee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee mee ree Lee ee a ere 9 12 CHAPTER 10 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 10 1to10 2 CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING 11 1t0o11 5 11 1 Precautions on Programming cae mcalaeds wad Ray goat a Odum ta aun mOml pt avam anual a aunt Jepaunce Balsa ah a agsriey asliuie iaunig
146. ch station including the own station b15b14 to b9 b8 b7 b6 to b1 bO SWOOBO Cyclic transmission Normal cyclic Abnormal cyclic to status of each transmission transmission 00B7 station station station Numbers from1 to 120 in the table indicate station numbers Numbers for b8 to b15 of SW00B7 are 0 fixed Conditions Same conditions as SBOOAO 11 1 Precautions on Programming 11 2 11 1 1 Interlock related signals DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY Seal MELSEC DATA LINK Pe LIBRARY PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FUNCTIONS ERROR CODES APPENDICES TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX 1 1 PROGRAMMING 11 2 Cyclic Transmission The link scan of the CC Link IE Controller Network and the execution of the user program are operated asynchronously When using data more than 32 bits double words indicated below new data and old data may be mixed in units of 16 bits 1 word depending on the execution timing of a user program e Floating point data e Current values and command speed of the positioning module CC Link IE Controller Network provides the following functions for not mixing new data and old data e 32 bit data assurance 32 bit data are assured by link refreshing the link device whose conditions of 32 bit data assurance are satisfied For details refer to the following manual K CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual e Station based block data assurance Cycl
147. cifications both CC Link IE Controller Network board and a personal computer must be satisfied after installation eeeeeeceeceaoeceeoeseesceeoeaeeeeeeceoeeeseeseeseeoeeeeeoe eee eeeoeeeaeoe eee a g 5 o gt mE 35 3 1 3 1 General Specifications 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 2 Performance Specifications Performance specifications of the CC Link IE Controller Network board are shown below Item Specification LB 32K points 32768 points 4K bytes Max link points per LW 128K points 131072 points 256K bytes network LX 8K points 8192 points 1K byte Ly 8K points 8192 points 1K byte Normal 16K points 16384 points 2K bytes Ee Extended mode 32K points 32768 points 4K bytes Max link points per LW Normal 16K points 16384 points 32K bytes station Extended mode 128K points 131072 points 256K bytes LX 8K points 8192 points 1K byte LY 8K points 8192 points 1K byte Transient transmission capacity Up to 1920 bytes Communications speed 1G bps Number of stations per network 120 stations Control station 1 Normal station 119 Connection cable Optical fiber cable Multi mode fiber Overall cable distance 66000 m When 120 stations are connected Station to station distance max 550 m Core clad 50 125 um Max number of networks 239 Max number of groups 32 Transmission path Duplex loop Optical fiber specificat
148. ck test O O Circuit test O x P Station to station test O O Z Network test O O 3 Communication test O O it a 3 5 Comparison of the additional functions E A CC Link IE Controller Function MELSECNET H board Network board Visibility of system status x Event function Cyclic transmission stop restart and link APPENDICES refresh stop Reserved station specification function Simplified duplexing of network Multiplex transmission x xO O JOO O O O O INDEX Appendix 4 Comparison with the MELSECNET H Board App 22 Appendix 4 1 Comparison of boards APPENDICES Appendix 4 2 Comparison of MELSECNET utilities The following describes the comparison of the utility functions between the CC Link IE Controller Network board and the MELSECNET H board Function Operation information monitoring function CC Link IE Controller Network board MELSECNET H board O Communication test function Link startup stop function Detailed information monitoring function Error history logging function Memory diagnostics function Channel number confirmation function Driver setting function Routing parameter setting function Event setting function Network range assignment setting function Target setting function Save file function Load file function O O O O OF OI OI O OI O O O OIO Appendix 4 3 Comparison of device
149. creating programs using data on a network 11 1 1 Interlock related signals The following table shows a list of the interlock signal devices used in a user program For details of other devices to check the operating status setting status and other functions of the own station and other stations refer to the following manual lt CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Assignment of link special relays SB and link special registers SW Board status of own station Description Stores the communication status between CC Link IE Controller Network board and personal computer Normal Device status Abnormal SB0047 Baton pass status of own station Stores a baton pass status of the own station A transient transmission is possible even when the Baton pass status of own station SB0047 is ON If the status is abnormal stores the cause of the abnormal status in the Baton pass status of own station SW0047 and Cause of baton pass interruption SW0048 Normal Abnormal SB0049 Data link status of own station Stores a data link status of the own station If the status is abnormal stores the cause of the abnormal status in the Cause of data link stop SW0049 Normal Abnormal SBOOAO 11 1 Baton pass status of each station Stores a baton pass status of each station If an abnormal station is found stores the station number to the Baton pass status of
150. ction corresponding to the error details and troubleshooting Is the data link disabled station a personal computer Review the programmable controller program Did data link fail during the NO monitor function execution Has data link normally recovered YES Monitor function User program Review using the B W X and Y in the P f Review the user program monitor function NO ves Is the RUN LED of the faulty station ON Is the faulty station a personal computer y lt CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Section 14 4 1 Flowchart when RUN LED is OFF Has data link normally recovered End Is the link mode at the faulty NO station set to Online Is the faulty station a NO personal computer 1 2 3 To the next page To the next page To the next page 14 22 14 4 Flowchart when Data Link Failed 14 4 5 Flowchart when data link to specific station is disabled 4 TROUBLESHOOTING S 1 2 3 2 l z Monitor function User program W gt Y OF Set Online on the Stop the user program and Set data link mode for the i REA F programmable controller to We Parameter setting screen perform the same operation Online and reset the
151. d ez a Initial status The channel numbers are automatically assigned in ou the order of PCI slot ChannelNo 151 NetworkNo 1 GroupNo J 0 Station No 1 num be k Type Normal station Status I Offline Board detail information Board 2 Channel No 152 Network No 1 Group No 0 Station No 1 Type Normal station Status Offline Board detail information CC IE Control utility fr HO w O zZ As aN INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 6 1 Parameter Settings Board Information Settings 6 3 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC b Only changing the channel number on the Parameter setting screen Even when the channel number of Board 1 is sti CC IE Control utility m Board 1 changed to 153 it is still Channel No 153 NetwokNo f 1 GroupNo 0 Station No 2 assigned to Board 1 Type Normal station Status Start data linking Board detail information Board 1 operates with the m Board 2 channel number 153 ChannelNo 152 NetworkNo 239 GroupNo 0 StationNo 1 Type Control station Status Start data linking Board detail information c Restarting the personal computer after changing the channel number on the Parameter setting screen When restarting the personal computer after the sti CC IE Control utility m Boardi channel number is Channel No Network No Groupo Station No changed to 153 Board 1 to Typ
152. display the Help screen of the Device monitor utility select Help Help S z i oO H Q le A Click a nz 9 2 4 Displaying the version information N To confirm the version of the Device monitor utility select Help Version o i amp ption Saca E Version Click x lt a 9 2 Operating Procedure 9 2 9 2 1 Starting the utility Q DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY 9 3 Setting the Batch Monitor Function This section explains the method for batch monitoring one type of specified devices 1 Selecting the menu Select Menu Batch monitor Selectable at 16 point register monitoring only 2 Display screen Device Monitor Utility Menu Setting Device Write DataFormat Option Help 1 e 151 CC IE Control Data Format The Channel information in the Current Display Screen Bit device Network No 0 Station No 255 Vertical indication Item Description Displays the current device status 1 Device information For changing a display format refer to the following section K Section 9 9 Switching a Display Format Displays the network status currently set 2 Network status For setting networks refer to the following section C Section 9 5 Setting a Monitor Target Displays type of device word device duble word device or bit device being displayed and displa
153. e 2 Installation method for supported version IE Install SW1DNC MNETG B with the software version 1 15R by double clicking Za Setup exe stored in the following folder on the CD ROM of software package CD ROM drive Win2k 2 3 Manual For the function and handling method for SW1DNC MNETG B with the software 5 version 1 15R refer to the manual SH 080691ENG O of the product The manual is f stored in the following folder on the CD ROM of software package CD ROM drive Win2k Manual F Se tu ERROR CODES gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 8 Restrictions for Operating System App 30 APPENDICES rs lisse Appendix 9 Warning Message Appears on Windows Appendix 9 1 Overview of warning message When using an operating system with the user account control function a warning message appears when starting the CC IE Control utility or the Device monitor utility Section 8 2 1 Starting the utility Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it Program name MnetgUtl exe Publisher Ur Inknown MnetgUtl exe spi sa A P m Unidentified Publisher File origin Hard drive on this computer Cancel Show details amn ES ai I don t know where this program is from or what it s for Allow rust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before amp Detai User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer App
154. e Status Board detail information 4 are assigned in d ith th m Board 2 accordance wi e Channel No 152 Network No 239 GroupNo 0 Station No 1 channel numbers Type Control station Status Start data linking Board detail infomation Board 1 before the restart nd Boar fter th Hon and Board 3 after the Channel No 153 NetworkNo 1 GroupNo 0 StationNo 2 restart are the same board Type Normal station Status Start data linking Board detail information 6 4 6 1 Parameter Settings Board Information Settings 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS 4 Operational setting Set a network number station number control station normal station and group number of the CC Link IE Controller Network board Parameter setting Target board specification M Boad1 M Board2 Boad3 P Boad4 Routing parameter Board 1 v Channel No 151 Operational setting Network type CCIE Control Control station v Mode Online Network No 14 Group No o Station No Network range assignment Driver setting Event setting Target setting Refresh parameter Check Default Load file Save file Verify Cancel a Network type Set a station type of the CC Link IE Controller Network board Max link points per Item Description i station for LB LW CC IE Control Control station Set as a control station of the network LB 16K points CC IE Control Normal station Set as a
155. e CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen of the CC IE Control utility process the error with following the troubleshooting Section 8 5 1 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen Then reexecute the circuit test 5 5 Test 5 5 4 Circuit test 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 5 5 5 Station to station test This test checks the cable connected between two stations from OUT at the executing a station to IN at the target station i The following explains a procedure for station to station test assuming the executing 9 station is the CC Link IE Controller Network board and the target station as the CC Link IE Controller Network module 6 Ke eeeeeecoeoeoeeeoeaeseeeeoeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee8 mo This section explains CC Link IE Controller Network board 2 For the setting of network module refer to the following manual 22 lt CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual eeeeeeaeeoeoeseoeeeeeeeeeeeeeoeeeeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeceoeeeeeeee eee 9 E 1 Check for the power discontinuity S Power OFF the personal computer G Power OFF the module D 2 Cable connection Connect an optical fiber cable to OUT at the executing station and IN at the target station O H Executing station Target station Z Station Station No n No n 1 IN i IN 5 Side Side OUT OUT Optical fiber cable W a O re Ww a 12
156. e 6 17 ERROR CODES eee eee eee eee eee eer ee 13 1 error MESSAGES seit eee ee ees 13 1 Event setting SCIECN rect ct ete eees 8 23 Event Settings R EATA EAT EE T nate 6 23 External Dimensions wee App 49 F File Output wees App 16 Function List cccccccccc cette eee 4 1 G General Specifications Sah ahi aati atarania ata aya a ea a taeraeta aaa aae ae 3 1 Group function Serer late yareierateperaia await sealers anu awnnieia snr e ae 12 15 H H W test cect ccc ener ees 5 19 I Information Required for Inquiries 077e enese 14 31 Installation lt cccc cette tet et eee 7 1 Installation environment ccccceccet cette 5 9 L LB LW settings iba thn es tas apes nt nea fa nea indnsind Svat nase ata eseiacaueinswia tel aaa 6 1 0 Link Special Registers SW al aacadn in aaa ais sacn ennai ares acepaeigae aa 1 1 5 Link Special Relays SB esiersisasesaseaaseredseriactaan 11 5 Link start stop SCreenN tirrtrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnrrrrrnrrnnn 8 38 List of functions mena ietetiavelianmtadaVasnncsV avast acaecs oiaactietatarsiatalavsi wiavs acelave tevatecs 8 2 List of the functions ETETE TTTTEEEETEEETTTTTETTEEETETETTTTT 9 1 Logging SCreEN tect teen 8 40 Low voltage directive Sipalaserqisave aus sus auntasaraoacasarasaem acehaimiauerasas woe App 45 LX LY settings tererectuaeaetersieredetactasetertrnterertaas 6 1 3 M Maximum No of transients in one station 12 3 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY veereceeeeeeeen 10 1 Memory Test screen sett tt ttt n
157. e 8 11 Multi Network System IEE OA IT A E EET 2 4 Multiple CPU System sersssuveveviserossscevsvevessssisssi 2 6 N Network range assignment screen eeen 8 15 Network Range Assignment Settings e ee 6 9 Numerical Pad ay aGaltns Sgeharie gala saree acdc s inl au aie GOAL Asal apRUaal ein aaa ar woataTac aya 9 12 0 Operating Environment tt terrrrrrttssssssrrrrrrrssens 2 7 Operating Procedure errrrrrtttsssssrrrrrrrrsssns 8 3 9 1 Optical Fiber Cable Specifications 3 3 P Parameter setting SCFERN etree eens 8 12 PARAMETER SETTINGS ERR ee ee 6 1 6 2 Part Names and Settings a aya E AAA AA 5 3 Performance Specifications aii Sea ara Sled aes aia are 3 2 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System Sadie nau dadeews aeadeteree Heduwatateuerheceduaedesesece App 1 Precautions on Programming asa dea ahah aS aiareayacn Gta ah weave oar are 11 1 Procedure before Operation Sassi wlareavelas tia urn tiay wate asitresee 5 1 Punctuality is guaranteed aia waa el gta wi aed Se oate eveniniaaveruras ue Stane 12 3 Index 1 DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY APPLICATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING ERROR CODES TROUBLESHOOTING n my fay Zz ii a a lt R Redundant CPU System wee 2 6 Routing fu nction eee eee eee ee eee ree 12 6 Routing parameter setting screen 07e en 8 19 Routing Parameter Settings wee 6 20 S Self loopback eee 5 20 SEND RECV function wees 12 16 Setting a Device
158. e EELT sheaf carpe wnt ae way Ws Mt ate Ya ata a slay atara naa 14 25 14 5 1 Flowchart when specific link device is not updated to the expected value eeeeteeeeeteee 14 25 14 5 2 Flowchart when data cannot be written or read with user program ttttrttttttttt 14 26 14 5 3 Flowchart when communications are occasionally disabled during user program EXECUTION ire eee eee ener nent ented 14 27 14 6 When External Power Supply Function did not Correctly Operate trtrrrttttttttttt ttt 14 28 14 7 Actions for WDT Error ish in was coal av aside Taracannievagetana anal apa alasesaleiauesmianaitiatalaravasadavauauaueaueuaie a asapacalaiap a stack muahausalaia ayacnla a eualasagenauenmaanausia alec opatep acs 14 29 14 7 1 Board WDT 1 8 90 econ 14 29 14 7 2 Driver WDT lt 7 0 10 ooo eno een ncoae 14 29 14 8 Measures for Slow Personal Computer Operation Aracacat num anv auaraisecapalajal eya avaee aye aust suai suntacataptiasalasacal aun aie acehage aya aaracataea a taut acs 14 30 14 9 Information Required for Inquiries Stree eee ere Che ee eRe ee Creer eT eee ee eer 14 31 APPENDICES App 1 to App 53 Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU SystemMteeeereerereerentrrrantrrnentrnrenrr nente App 1 Appendix 2 Network Status at Power ON OFF and Board Reset During Data Linking App 10 Appendix 2 1 Network status at power ON OFF TETELE aye pane Rca anceal a Aver AlayBcawn a Raia To aiat er acai A
159. e buttons to switch screens when the total number of E Next stations is 61 or more _ 8 30 8 5 Diagnostics Screen 8 5 1 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 2 Icon Displays the status of each station and between stations ff S s 1 1 Connected lt 2 3 4 AL A w B l Pk Contro 3 Pal z ssign Control KX o 4 ae ye O 1 Station number ane Displays station number of the CC Link IE Controller Network module or CC Link IE Controller Network board a aa 2 Connected station Connected is displayed at the back of the station number for connected 5 m stations g 3 Icon B The following table shows the description of station icons displayed Icon Description 9 Ba Normally operating station 5 Faulty station Although cyclic transmission is in operation an error is De Pid Fy occurring in boards modules or cables Lu Faulty station Cyclic transmission is stopped 5 z 95 F Disconnected station black or a 25 m Reserved station gray uw gt Selected station green edged station icon e Can be selected by clicking a station icon or moving the focus with the zg right or left arrow key and clicking the space bar On ne Os Displays detailed information in Select station network device status AGE display field Oe e Disconnected stations and reserved stations cannot be selected oO Me
160. e end of device to be refreshed on the personal Q 5 m n computer 28 S Changes the settings of Link side and PC side to the gz fe Default hare initial values 8 Check Checks the settings of Link side and PC side for errors Reflects the settings and closes the Refresh parameter End settings screen re 5 c e Ss o 8 8 4 Setting Screen 8 27 8 4 9 Refresh parameter setting screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY Cancel 8 28 8 4 Setting Screen Item Description Without reflecting the settings closes the Refresh parameter settings screen 4 The initial values of the refresh parameter setting are indicated in the following table MELS a G Default Setting range Setting item Device name Points Start End Trans 1 LB 32768 0000 7FFF Trans 2 LW 131072 0000 1FFFF Trans 3 LX 8192 0000 1FFF Trans 4 LY 8192 0000 1FFF Trans 5 to 256 No settings 2 The setting ranges of the refresh parameter for each device are indicated in the following table Device Item Setting range Points 16 to 32767 multiples of 16 LB Start 0000 to 7FFO multiples of 16 End OOOF to 7FFF multiples of 16 1 Points 1 to 131072 LW Start 00000 to 1FFFF End 00000 to 1FFFF Points 16 to 8192 multiples of 16 LX Start 0000 to 1FFO multiples of 16 End OOOF to 1FFF multiples of 16 1 Points 16 to 8192 mul
161. e link as refresh range The link refresh time can be shortened by decreasing the link Sans P ade refresh points for the personal computer side DZE 2 If the network range assignment is changed check the link refresh range as She well 3 When setting the refresh parameters use the 1 08J or later version of CC IE Control utility For checking versions Appendix 6 Checking Serial Number and Function Version If the parameter file set and written on the 1 07H or earlier version of CC IE Control utility is read by the 1 08J or later version initial settings are set for the refresh parameters ez fr MEO ZZ As awn e If the parameter file set and written on the 1 08J or later version of CC IE ih Control utility is read by the 1 07H or earlier version a file read error 9 S oq occurs u EE Version to which Version from which parameter file is read 206 parameter file is written 1 07H or earlier 1 08J or later 253 1 07H or earlier No settings Initial values 1 08J or later File read error Set values 4 The refresh parameter settings are not required for SB SW since the link device storage area is accessed directly when reading writing SB SW O gt uE 85 6 10 Refresh Parameter Setting 6 25 T INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CHAPTER 7 MELSEC INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES This chapter explains about installing and uninstalling the softwa
162. e to do so may cause the board to fail or malfunction Handle the board in a place where static electricity will not be generated Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction The board is included in an antistatic envelope When storing or transporting it be sure to put it in the antistatic envelope Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction Do not drop or apply a strong impact to the board Doing so may cause a failure or malfunction Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the personal computer Such foreign matter may cause a fire failure or malfunction When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste 5 8 5 3 Installation 5 3 1 Handling precautions 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC 5 3 2 Installation environment For installation of the personal computer in which the CC Link IE Controller Network board a is installed refer to the manual for the personal computer i Use the board in an environment that meets the general specifications in CAUTION 9 p this manual gt Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to 2 or deterioration of the product Always ground the personal computer to the protective ground conductor e Failure to do so may cause a malfunction 25 5 3 3 Board installation The following flowchart shows the board installation procedure z 5 a i Vv Power O
163. e value for the equally assigned start device number within the range of XX to YY The setting value for the number of equally assigned points assigned is outside the range Please input a value within the range XX YY Set the value for the equally assigned points within the range of XX to YY The number of identical assigned points setting is outside the range Changing the number of identical assigned points setting within the range XX YY Set the value for the identical assigned points within the range of XX to YY 4 Routing parameter setting screen Corrective action Error message The Target network No setting value is outside the range Please input a value within the range 1 239 Set the value for the Target Network No within the range of 1 to 239 The relay network No setting value is outside the range Please input a value within the range 1 239 Set the value for the Relay Network No within the range of 1 to 239 The relay station No setting value is outside the range Please input a value within the range 1 120 Set the value for the Relay Station No within the range of 1 to 120 The Target network Nos are overlapping Please set them so that they do not overlap Set the Target Network No not to overlap 5 Supplementary setting screen Corrective action Error message The constant scan setting value is outside the range Please input a value within the range 1 500 I
164. each station must be set to the maximum link points or less which are total points of LB LW settings 1 and LB LW settings 2 2 Extending the maximum link points for each station Select extension mode in network type of parameter setting the maximum link points for each station can be extended Section 6 1 Parameter Settings Board Information Settings Network type Max link points per station for LB LW CC IE Control Control station LB 16K points LW 16K points CC IE Control Normal station Ai CC IE Control Extended mode Control station CC IE Control Extended mode Normal station LB 32K points LW 128K points 3 Assuring 32 bit data integrity If settings are made with the following conditions 1 to 4 satisfied 32 bit data integrity will be automatically assured 1 The start device No of LB is a multiple of 20H 2 The points assigned per station in LB is a multiple of 20H 3 The start device No of LW is a multiple of 2 4 The points assigned per station in LW is a multiple of 2 For details of the 32 bit data assurance refer to the following manual K3 CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual 6 10 6 3 Network Range Assignment Settings 6 3 1 LB LW settings 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 4 Setting example Network No 1 1Ns4 1Ns3 a When assigning 512 points to each station s send range in LB LW LB LWsettings 1 Network ra
165. eaiaia al goes Atavaual unialerausena Saraalaca sia ianaceaia 14 9 14 3 When CC Link IE Controller Network Board did not Operate Normally 1srtrrtttttttt 14 11 14 3 1 Checking personal computer and operating system sk lt cack a asa fate ce yw a fam Sa at a aaa at 14 11 14 3 2 Checking on Event Viewer SCIERN corr rt t etn tt eters 14 2 12 14 3 3 Checking on Device Manager SCIEN rrr tte t eee e as 14 15 14 4 Flowchart when Data Link Failed ETTET TETT TLETT SUG au Rg AoA 9d nual te MUS niTa esata sas asa ovaya alin adaDialin Rm aC a niayasay aye ia Suet aiataan R a o7al ETETETT 14 16 14 4 1 Flowchart when RUN LED is OFF geen aS atte incase carga nfm ofa Sra wn fant a6 aa tcarsn ee cara aay ane ajar acusfevarah ey ata Vahey apesate ates 14 17 14 4 2 Flowchart when SD RD LEDs are OFF Pre CREE terre eee eee eT Ce eee ee errr ere 14 bs 18 14 4 3 Flowchart when ERR LED turned ON ais naassndnvedatn aun jus idsnicns Bin nsd teh avn iavesatetnta apaiwtecaakve ace iacm aaah eras ae atarace iaunceini aiaueretecauereva jatacetare 14 19 14 4 4 Flowchart when data link among whole system is disabled rrrttttttttttetttttttee 14 20 14 4 5 Flowchart when data link to specific station is disabled s ttttrrttttttttttttttttettees 14 22 14 4 6 Flowchart when RUN LED is flashing aa ea a aaa Saat aca aa am a wh aaa a aa waa a cates een 14 24 14 5 Flowchart for Error during Data Link ea iW ae Pc aCe rane care rv eae a Wat
166. eated on the 32 bit version operating system however the following screen appears and cannot be executed lt When using Windows XP 32 bit version gt C MELSEC MTEST exe x C MELSEC MTEST exe is not a valid Win32 application lt When using Windows 7 32 bit version gt The version of this file is not compatible with the version of Windows you re running Check your computer s system information to see whether you need an x86 32 bit or x64 64 bit version of the program and then contact the software publisher b User programs created in the Japanese environment work only in the Japanese environment c User programs created in the English environment work only in the English environment 2 5 Operating Environment 3 SPECIFICATIONS W This chapter explains general and performance specifications of CC Link IE Controller Network board 35 3 1 General Specifications Z The following table shows the general specifications of CC Link IE Controller Network s2 board Ei cas Item Specification 3 Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Storage ambient temperature 25 to 75 C 2 Operating ambient humidit iS P 9 y 5 to 95 RH non condensing amp Storage ambient humidity g Under intermittent vibration S Constant D Frequency Half amplitude Sweep count acceleration 5 to 8 4 Hz 3 5 mm 10 time
167. eceived when the target station is a board For details refer to the RECV function 12 16 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 12 1 4 SEND RECV function 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 4 POINT 5 The multiple network modules are installed on the target station Specify the network number and station number of the network module which is to be received request from the own station Specify 1Ns2 in the following example 2MP1 cannot be specified Own station Target station Specify 1Ns2 as the target station Nepwone NO 4 newer 2Mp1 cannot be specified r 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 1 2 17 12 1 4 SEND RECV function DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY ye PROGRAMMING z F q0 OF ae Es tu ERROR CODES APPENDICES TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 12 18 2 RECV function The RECV function reads data received by the board from the other station using the mdReceive mdReceiveEx function lt RECV function overview gt Driver User application Reception buffer of driver Received data of Channel 3 Received data storage data Received data of Channel 7 Send source network No Board Received data of Channel 1 3 Saue s Sending station p Send source channel No 2 Channel Received data of Channel 5
168. ected error occurred Cannot monitor e Set the network parameters correctly e Restart the CC IE Control utility The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B Logging screen cannot be displayed correctly Return to diagnostics screen e Set the network parameters correctly e Restart the CC IE Control utility The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B Data to display includes incorrect value Monitoring is stopped e Set the network parameters correctly e Restart the CC IE Control utility e The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B Characters that are not allowed for the File name are used The characters lt gt and cannot be used for the File name Abnormal for the Space character of all File Name This file name is for reserved device and cannot be used Set another file name Use characters other than the disabled characters for file names Use a file name other than the used ones Please specify the Drive Path File name including extension with in 150 characters Specify the Drive Path File name within 150 characters A directory cannot be created The likely causes are as follows Please check the write destination e Itis write protected e The drive is not ready Cancel the write protection or prepare the drive As project path is not set it cann
169. ection 11 1 2 Section 11 2 Section 12 1 Section 12 4 Section 12 5 Section 12 6 Section 12 7 Section 12 8 Section 12 9 Section 13 1 1 Section 13 2 Section 13 2 1 Section13 3 CHAPTER 14 Section 14 2 Section 14 2 1 Section14 2 2 Section14 2 3 Section 14 3 CHAPTER 15 Section 16 2 Section 16 3 Section 16 3 1 Section 16 4 Section 16 4 1 Section16 4 2 Section 16 4 3 Section 16 4 4 Section 16 4 5 Section 16 4 6 Section 16 5 2 Section 16 5 3 Section 16 5 4 Section 16 7 APPENDICES Addition Section 9 4 7 Print Date Manual Number Revision Addition Section 9 3 4 Correction Section 2 5 Section 2 6 Section 6 5 1 Section 6 5 2 Section 6 5 3 Section 6 6 1 Section 6 6 2 Section 7 1 Section 9 3 3 Section 9 4 1 Appendix 6 2 Correction Sep 2008 SH NA 080691ENG E Section 2 5 Section 3 2 Section 7 1 Section 9 3 1 Section 9 4 1 Appendix 6 1 Correction Oct 2008 SH NA 080691ENG F PRECAUTIONS FOR USE GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Section 2 5 Section 9 4 6 Section 9 4 7 Section 11 1 2 Addition Section 7 10 Section 9 4 9 Section 16 8 Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Section 2 2 2 Section 2 3 2 Section 4 2 1 CHAPTER 5 Section 6 5 1 Apr 2009 SH NA 080691ENG G Section 6 5 2 Section 6 5 3 Section 6 6 1 Section 6 6 2 CHAPTER 7 Section 7 1 Section 7 2 Section 7 5 Section 7 6 Section 7 7 Section 8 1 1 Section
170. ector plug which is an exclusive product When purchasing it please consult your local Mitsubishi representative me Incomplete connection can result in a short fire or malfunction Eg Securely plug the communication cable to the connector of the board Then Ze check for any incomplete connection Lo Poor contact may cause an erroneous input or output a 0 Remarks PERETETEETETETETETTETETETETETEETETETETETEETETETETE a S Zoa IL A For optical fiber cables refer to the following manual Q 5 y TAL K CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual 22 eeeeeeoeeeoeeeeaeaeoeeeeeeeeoeeeseeeoeeoeaeeeeeeeeeeaoeeoeaeeeeaeoeeeee 229 g 5 Siea w 5 35 5 4 Wiring 5 11 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 3 Precautions for external power supply cable wiring Place the communication cable and the external power supply cable A CAUTION connected to the board in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cables may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the board or cables or malfunctions due to poor contact Check the rated voltage and pin out before wiring to the external power supply cable and connect the cables correctly Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure Do not install the external power supply or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm 3 94 in or more be
171. ed emissions The tests by Mitsubishi were conducted using a control panel having the damping characteristics of 37dB maximum and 30dB average measured at 3m distance 30 to 300MHz b Wiring power and ground cables The power supply cable and ground cable for a personal computer should be laid out as follows e Provide a ground point to the control panel near the power supply module Ground the FG terminal of the personal computer and the SLD terminal of the CC Link Ver 2 board to the ground point with the thickest and shortest ground cable possible 30cm or shorter e Twist the ground cable leading to the ground point with the power supply cable By twisting it with the ground cable the noise leaking from the power supply cable may be grounded at a higher rate However twisting the power supply cable with the ground cable may not be necessary if a noise filter is installed on the power supply cable App 47 Appendix 12 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE Appendix 12 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive APPENDICES 3 Noise filter power line filter Noise filter is effective for reducing conducted noise in the 10MHz or less frequency Use of a noise filter can suppress noise The installation precautions are described below e Do not bundle the cables on the input side and output side of the noise filter If bundled the output side noise will be induced into the filtered cable on the input side Input
172. ed station to the specified station i Displays the station number that was relayed at loopback from the own Station No f N j 0 to 120 station connected station to the specified station Own station Displays the information of the own station connected station Network No Displays the network number of the own station connected station 1 to 239 Station No Displays the station number of the own station connected station 1 to 120 8 36 8 5 Diagnostics Screen 8 5 2 Communication test screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY MELSEC Item Description Set Display Communication information Displays the communication information Communication count Displays the number of communications 1 to 100 ff Communication time Displays the communication time 1 to i Destination Displays the information of the communication target fe Displays the network number that is entered for the communication Network No 1 to 239 target specification Displays the station number that is entered for the communication Station No 0 to 120 target specification Close Closes the Communication test screen ii nz DO On the initial screen only setting fields of the communication test are displayed as 4 shown below z i O Communication Test m Communication test details Yn 1 Destination 2 Communication data Network No 1 Length 100 Byte Station No Comm
173. ee es 8 15 8 4 3 Equal assignment SCEN ee cere 8 17 8 4 4 Routing parameter setting SCEN ecco rece 8 19 8 4 5 Supplementary setting SCrEEN pence ere 8 20 8 4 6 Driver setting SCEN eee ccc 8 21 8 4 7 Event setting SCrEEN eee 8 23 8 4 8 Target setting SCrEEN eee een 8 25 8 4 9 Refresh parameter setting Ye 8 eee 8 27 8 5 Diagnostics Screen aa vw a yan aT EERE EEEO EEEE EEEE EET WT aay rw aware ae ana Jecwte Writ w atu nwiweoeweamareg 8 29 8 5 1 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result sereen strtrttrt ttt 8 29 8 5 2 Communication test 1618 lt 1 0 ee ccc 8 36 8 5 3 Link start stop 701 1 0 eee 8 38 8 5 4 Logging Screen esecreeetee treet e eee e estes teeter etree test reee tees etteee treet teees teres 8 40 CHAPTER 9 DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY 9 1to9 12 9 1 OveryjeW irr nnn enn e nnn nen enneeeen anne eens eessesean anne nnsssseessaannenreres 9 1 9 1 1 List of the functions rrr ttre ene tenner nnn n eee eesea arene eneeesenaes 9 1 9 2 Operating Procedure ipa aif an ula Bm Bm wry wr BtoB trv rll Bi WT Wa gow lB rah WM Sw aly ied WN cae naw A Sia 9 gl 9 2 1 Starting the utility eette er tettet ereetretetnetntertntttnetttetenttttnennetnettenettntt enet 9 2 9 2 2 Ending the utility E EEEO E TEE EE EEE TILLERI TE ELE EEEE EET TIREE EEEIEE EELE ES 9 2 9 2 3 Displaying the Help SCEN eee 9 2 9 2 4 Displaying the version information lt ccctcr ttt nen een enn n nnn e nee eneeaes 9 2 A 16 9 3 Setting the Bat
174. ee s Focusing Station icon edged with dotted line e Clicking a space bar changes to a selected station 9 ramas Wamran Disconnected stations and reserved stations cannot be selected a g O Communication error lt S a a e Displays detailed information in Select station network device status z 309 display field when selecting the station next to the one in which a Be E Zz communication error is occurring oe 4 Present Control and Assign Control Present Control Displayed to the station actually operating as a control station Assign Control Displayed to the control station set in the parameter 5 c e Ss o 8 5 Diagnostics Screen 8 31 8 5 1 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 3 Display position of disconnected station a When normal connection information has been obtained 1 The disconnected station is displayed in the position where it was connected when operated normally 5 6 8 1 Connected 2 3 4 A BH E B M 23 4 Present Control Assign Control 1 Conditions and timing for normal connection information acquisition When all of the following conditions are met the normal connection information is stored in the CC Link IE Controller Network module All stations are in data link status Cyclic transmission status of each station SBOOBO is OFF e No station is loopbacked Loopback s
175. em or redundant CPU system the Target setting screen setting must be completed KCF Section 8 4 8 Target setting screen x POINT When a CC Link IE Controller Network board with a serial number whose first five digits are 10091 or lower or an SW1DNC MNETG B with the software Version 1 04E or earlier is used the redundant CPU system cannot be accessed directly with the CC Link IE Controller Network interface board Relay the MELSECNET H network system to access the redundant CPU system OVERVIEW z Q E lt q a 5 9 Le z e iS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION PARAMETER SETTINGS INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 2 4 Use in Multiple CPU System or Redundant CPU System 2 6 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 5 Operating Environment The following table shows the operating environment for the CC Link IE Controller Network board Item Description Personal computer Windows supported personal computer CPU System requirements of the operating system must be met Required memory PCI bus For Q80BD J71GP21 SX Q80BD J71GP21S SX specifications e Compliant with PCI standard Rev 2 2 3 3VDC 5VDC 32 bit bus Basic clock 33MHz For Q81BD J71GP21 SX Q81BD J71GP21S SX e Compliant with PCI Express standard Rev 1 1 3 3VDC Link width 1lane Basic clock 100MHz Microsoft Windows 2000 Profess
176. en entering the power save mode gt e The CC Link IE Controller Network board stops its operation and is disconnected from the network e The board is not reconnected even after the personal computer returns from the power save mode standby hibernate e After recovering from the power save mode standby hibernate 28141 9213H System sleep error occurs when accessing CC Link IE Controller Network board from the CC IE Control utility or an application program which includes MELSEC data link library function lt Corrective action gt e Change the setting of the WindowsR Power Options settings not to enter the standby mode or hibernation mode and restart Windows App 39 Appendix 10 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup Appendix 10 1 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode standby hibernate APPENDICES M LS E G Appendix 10 2 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep 1 Target operating system The following operating systems have the power save mode hibernation sleep e Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 e Windows Server 2008 R2 e Windows 7 e Windows Server 2012 e Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 e Windows 8 1 2 Behavior when entering the hibernation sleep mode The following explains the behavior of the board when the power save mode hibernate sleep is entered on
177. enters teneten 3 4 A 14 3 2 Performance Specifications ia are cae ae a WT acu ac kta enatirsG ate wr Waa a Dl ata earn te aime Wate Sataater a whan a ata a aLota aG ania warn ara rearaeneacaere 3 2 3 3 Optical Fiber Cable Specifications trrrrrttrtterr rte etree reer nntnnennrtenrrreeeees 3 3 3 4 Buffer Memory vitittcrrrrrrrrr irrrr ri iiiinieccccccereiirrirrrr rrr i ey 3 3 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 1to4 7 4 1 Function Lis tess ete ae eB eae ae aa A eae ge aaa ea 4 1 4 2 Specifications on Cyclic Transmission Processing ttitt rrr i es 4 2 421 Cyclic transmission processing sittin 4 2 A3 Driver WDT function ttc ttt AEAEE EA AEAEE AAAA ASAA 4 7 CHAPTER5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 5 1to 5 28 51 Procedure before Operation Re 5 14 5 2 Part Names and Settings ssrrrt rere EEEE 5 3 53 installato e nns na eeens as Enise casein oe ted ee tanaere reer maken EE SERE Es 5 8 5 3 1 Handling precautions 11rrrrrri errr cciicerrrriiirrrrr rrr riny 5 8 5 3 2 Installation environment cc EE n nn iii nein 5 9 5 3 3 Board installation ccc nn nn nn N ENAERE EANAN 5 9 5 3 4 Setting Channel Numbers 1111rr trite rr rrr nna 5 10 5A Wiring rrr rir rr iiininiiccccceririitirrrr EENEN 5 11 5 41 Controller network system sort iri iiiiiiiriiiiies 5 13 542 Wiring external power supply Cable v11111srssrrrrrrrrrtte ete ti ey 5 15 EP Tes tatasecttics tatidantact i dba da dacadegle AEA AAAA A chdaeada steaks cee 5 17 5 5 1 Bus
178. er In order to execute the link refresh set the link refresh cycle and the refresh parameters in the CC IE Control utility a Concept of refresh range points Within the range set on the Refresh parameter setting screen of the CC IE Network range assignment parameter Range to be actually tation refreshed No 1 Range set by network range assignment l Range set by i refresh parameters 4 POINT The range from the first to the last addresses is set as the initial setting of the refresh parameter Clicking the Default button on the Refresh parameter setting screen of the CC IE Control utility resets the setting to the initial setting 4 5 4 2 Specifications on Cyclic Transmission Processing 4 2 1 Cyclic transmission processing 4 FUNCTIONS b How to decrease the refresh points Up to 256 refresh ranges can be set for the CC Link IE Controller Network board The refresh points can be decreased by setting only the ranges that need to be refreshed in the refresh parameter Set refresh parameters for required part only Personal computer Driver buffer IEIS LIL SZ Station No 3 4 2 Specifications on Cyclic Transmission Processing 4 2 1 Cyclic transmission processing aL SEC CC Link IE controller Network board Network range assignment parameter Range set by network range assignment 4 6 OVERVIEW CONFIG
179. er Account Control screen requests the password entry of its user only 2 For details on how to prevent this screen from being displayed refer to Appendix 9 14 2 Troubleshooting of Installation Uninstallation 14 2 1 The following explains the troubleshooting for error at installation or uninstallation e Installation failed Section 14 2 1 e Uninstallation failed lt Section 14 2 2 Installation failed When the installation is aborted or failed reinstall the utility by the following procedure 1 Check the installation uninstallation precautions Section 7 1 2 Restart the personal computer 3 If the utility can be uninstalled uninstall it Section 7 2 After the uninstallation restart the personal computer 4 Install the utility again by following the installation procedure When the corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective Section 14 2 3 5 If the personal computer does not operate normally after the reinstallaion check if the personal computer has any problems e Operating Environment Section 2 5 e Checking personal computer and operating system Section 14 3 2 If the troubleshooting above does not help refer to Section 14 9 1 4 4 14 2 Troubleshooting of Installation Uninstallation 14 2 1 Installation failed 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 2 2 Uninstallation failed When the uninstallation is failed uninstall the utility after the reinstallation by the following
180. er s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards h
181. eriodical communication Communication by LX LY Assurance of cyclic data integrity Block data assurance per station station based block data assurance Cyclic transmission punctuality assurance Constant link scan RAS functions _ Control station switching function gt lt CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual gt lt z O Lu N Lu LIBRARY Loopback function Automatic return function Cable fault detection function Cable insertion error detection function Detection of duplicated control station or station number Prevention of station failure by ee lt Section 1 2 Features using external power supply Section 5 4 Wiring j lfliine A A Section 5 5 Test Driver WDT function rteeteereretesees Section 4 3 Driver WDT function ye PROGRAMMING Application Cyclic transmission function Periodical communication Section 11 2 Cyclic Transmission 5 b functions Transient transmission Communication function Section 12 1 1 Communication function E function Routing function Section 12 1 2 Routing function g 5 ar az Non periodical Group function Section 12 1 3 Group function Z 2 communication Changing number of transient transmissions 3 K CC Link IE Controller Network M Read from write to other station devices Referen
182. ervic Local System Local Service Network Servic Local Service Local System Local System Local Service a APPENDICES Appendix 11 MELSECPowerManager Appendix 11 3 Checking MELSECPowerManager INDEX App 44 APPENDICES Appendix 12EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE Compliance with the EMC Directive which is one of the EU directives has been mandatory for the products sold within EU member states since 1996 as well as compliance with the Low Voltage Directive since 1997 To prove the compliance manufactures must issue an EC Declaration of Conformity and the products must bear a CE marking 1 Sales representative in EU member states The authorized representative in EU member states will be Company name Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV Address Gothaer Strasse 8 40880 Ratingen Germany Appendix 12 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive The final decision on the method for the EMC Directive conformance and the application must be made by the manufacturer of the machinery The EMC Directive sets two requirements for compliance emission conducted and radiated electromagnetic energy emitted by a product and immunity the ability of a product to not be influenced by externally generated electromagnetic energy This section summarizes the precautions for machinery constructed with the CC Link IE Controller Network board to comply with the EMC Directive These precautions are ba
183. eter or abnormal data board 288 0120n Driver WDT error occurred Refer to Driver WDT error Section 14 7 2 e Remove another I F board 291 0123n Failed to map the shared memory area e Change the I O port address of another I F board on the 14 12 BIOS setting screen 14 3 When CC Link IE Controller Network Board did not Operate Normally 14 3 2 Checking on Event Viewer screen 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING Event ID 294 0126H Error message The I O port of the I F board overlaps with that of another hardware Corrective action e Remove another I F board e Change the I O port address of another I F board on the BIOS setting screen 295 0127H Board WDT error occurred The board may be a failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 296 0128H Clock stop error occurred in the board The board may be a failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 297 0129H Target abort error occurred in the board The board may be a failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 304 0130x Data parity error occurred in the board The board may be a failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 305 0131H Entering sleep mode or hibernation mode or fast startup is detected The board is not operated normally because the sleep mode hibernation mode and fast startup is not supported by the board Change the power o
184. etting screen or Device Manager screen LGOTA ONE Y ERROR CODES Reinstall the driver of the other optional boards Replace the other optional boards Does the board operate normally on another Reinstall the operating system after formatting HD personal computer e Repair or replace the personal computer W For the problem of the personal computer or operating system contact the personal 2 computer or operating system manufacturer ci lt x lt W Q zZ 14 3 When CC Link IE Controller Network Board did not Operate Normally 1 4 11 14 3 1 Checking personal computer and operating system 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 3 2 Checking on Event Viewer screen Check the operation of the board with Windows Event Viewer screen Event logs related to the CC Link IE Controller Network board are displayed as AMnetg or Mccien in the Source field on the Event Viewer screen 1 For error events When an error occurs in a driver the error description is displayed in the System Log field on the Event Viewer screen The following table explains actions for each error message 4 POINT When multiple errors occur check the chronological order time of occurrence on the Event Viewer screen and handle the errors in the order Event ID Error message Corrective action Check installed status of the CC Link IE Controller Network 257 0101h The I F board was not found board
185. exadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal Setting Data Enter a value to be changed HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal Set the number of device points whose values are to be changed continuously Points HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal 64 or more points cannot be specified Device Type Device No A WARNING When changing data during operation configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely Configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure When the DEC Decimal is selected only signed decimal format can be specified 9 7 9 7 Changing Word Device Double Word Device Values Q DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEG 9 a 2 eeeeeeceoeoeoeeoeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeeeaoe eee 2 e A data of a word device double word device can also be changed by double T clicking the device number on the monitoring screen 2 yyuuin W 0 0 0 Q Ors 0 a8 a wa el When the display format is set to decimal unsigned 16 bits or decimal unsigned 32 bits on the Date Changing screen displayed by double clicking the device column the value same as the display format can be set Device LTN 2 HER C pec 00000000 2 cme o EZ eeeoeeeoevseeneeaoeveoeeoeeeaoeeoeseeeeoeeeeoeeeeoeaeeeeeoe eae
186. exclusive product When purchasing it please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Incomplete connection can result in a short fire or malfunction Securely plug the communication cable to the connector of the board Then check for any incomplete connection Poor contact may cause an erroneous input or output Wiring Precautions CAUTION Use a specified tool for crimping of the cable and contacting pin Imperfect crimping may cause a malfunction Verify the pin out and fully insert the crimped contacting pin into the connector Imperfect insertion may cause a failure or malfunction Insert the wired external power supply cable into the external power supply cable connector until a click is heard Imperfect insertion may cause a failure or malfunction Always ground the personal computer to the protective ground conductor Failure to do so may cause a malfunction Startup Maintenance Precautions WARNING Shut off all phases of the external power supply before cleaning the board or retightening the fixing screws Failure to do so may result in an electric shock or cause a failure or malfunction of the board Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before installing the board to or removing it from the personal computer Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the board to fail or malfunction Do not connect or disconnect any communication cable while
187. executing Equal assignment closes the Cancel 3 n i Equal assignment screen 7 0 1 In LX LY setting the entered total points of assignment are assigned to LY for M station gt L A g station equal assignment and to LX for M station L station equal assignment Z g lt 2 Setting ranges of the start number and total points of assignment for each device are indicated in 2a ma the following table p p k 250 oe 5 i e Ss o 8 4 Setting Screen 8 17 8 4 3 Equal assignment screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 18 Device Item Start number MELSEC Setting range 0000 to 7FFO units of 16 points hexadecimal input ais Total points assigned 16 to 32768 units of 16 points LW Start number 00000 to 1FFFF units of 1 point hexadecimal input Total points assigned 1 to 131072 units of 1 point LX Start number 0000 to 1FFO units of 16 points hexadecimal input Total points assigned 16 to 8192 units of 16 points LY Start number 0000 to 1FFO units of 16 points hexadecimal input 8 4 Setting Screen Total points assigned 8 4 3 Equal assignment screen 16 to 8192 units of 16 points 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 4 4 Routing parameter setting screen This screen is displayed by clicking the Rout
188. f a redundant system e Remains ON OFF even if the tracking cable is disconnected while the System A Bin ie redundant system is running M1511 identification fla At the time of TRK CABLE System A System B ERR Error code 6120 occurrence System not determined System B SM1511 ON OFF OFF SM1512 identification SM1512 OFF ON OFF flag 2 When checking the operation system status e Indicates the CPU module operation status e Remains ON OFF even if the tracking cable is disconnected while the redundant system is running SM1515 Control Sania endl At the time of TRK CABLE Standby aca e aed ERR Error code 6120 occurrence system y y System not determined status SM1515 ON OFF OFF SES SM1516 OFF ON OFF 3 Retry processing for error that occurs during system switching processing When the MELSEC data link library is used to access the Redundant CPU during system switching being processed by the Redundant CPU a system switching error error code 4248x CPU starting error error code 4004 other system CPU module error error code 4245x access destination illegal error error code FFDFx or similar error occurs In this case create a user program that checks the error code and performs retry processing as necessary a The following indicates the functions that result in error if executed during system switching ee ee Functions that result
189. f not setting it leave this setting blank Set the value for the constant scan within the range of 1 to 500 or leave it blank The setting value for the maximum number of transients for one station is outside the range Please input a value within the range 1 10 6 Driver setting screen Set the value for the maximum number of transients for one station within the range of 1 to 10 Error message Corrective action The link refresh cycle setting value is outside the range Please input the value within the range 1 1000 Set the value for the link refresh cycle within the range of 1 to 1000 The Driver WDT monitoring time setting value is outside the range Please input a value within the range 1 32767 Set the value for the driver WDT monitoring time within the range of 1 to 32767 The transient timeout monitoring time setting value is outside the range Please input a value within the range 1 360 13 5 Set the value for the transient timeout monitoring time within the range of 1 to 360 13 1 List of Error Messages in CC IE Control Utility 13 1 2 Error messages displayed on the setting screen 1 3 ERROR CODES MELSE G 7 Event setting screen oc Error message Corrective action e The event No is outside the range a DAN Set the value for the event number within the range of 0 to 63 Please input a value within the range 0
190. for returning from the request target to the request source when sending a response Either setting or both settings must be required for each station DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY 1 Request source 2 Relay station 3 Relay station 4 Relay station MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 1Ns3 f 1Ns2 2Mp1 2Ns2 3Ns3 e 3Ns2 4Mp1 7 Relay station 6 Relay station 5 Relay station 7Mp1 6Ns2 e 6Mp1 5Ns2 5Mp1 4Ns2 8 Relay station 9 Request target 7Ns2 8Mp1 e gt 8Ns4 ye PROGRAMMING Target network 3 6 9 Relay network No Relay station No ES No oO z l 1 Request source 1 8 1 2 Used when sending a request aS aE o fu 2 Relay station 1 8 2 2 Used when sending a request N A a 1 8 3 2 Used when sending a request Q 3 Relay station 8 3 2 SE i S 2 1 2 1 Used when sending a response O n W d 8 4 2 Used when sending a request 4 Relay station 8 l 2 i i en Z 2 1 3 3 Used when sending a response ee 1 8 5 2 Used when sending a request W 5 Relay station 8 5 2 SIS a 2 1 4 1 Used when sending a response z 1 8 6 2 Used when sending a request 6 Relay station 8 6 2 w 9 q 2 1 5 1 Used when sending a response N O 1 8 7 2 Used when sending a request O 7 Relay station 8 7 2
191. for slow personal computer operation The following shows the probable causes for slow personal computer operation when the processing time for the link refresh is increased in the total processing capacity e The link refresh cycle is short e There are many refresh points e The processing capacity of a personal computer is low 2 Corrective measures The following shows the measures when the operation of a personal computer becomes slow e Extend the link refresh cycle on the Driver setting screen of the CC IE Control utility Section 8 4 6 Driver setting screen e Decrease the refresh points on the Refresh parameter setting screen of the CC IE Control utility Section 4 2 1 Cyclic transmission processing 5 b 1 4 30 14 8 Measures for Slow Personal Computer Operation 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 9 Information Required for Inquiries When the troubleshooting cannot solve the problem or a board failure occurs please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative Inform the following conditions and situations when inquiring the problems 1 Product information Item Condition Situation Reference Model Board Rating plate Product Product information Appendix 13 version Model SW1DNC MNETG Utility Version __ Personal Manufacturer computer name Personal computer name Example Intel Core 2 DuoProcessor 3GHz Personal CPU Section 2 5 compute
192. gnment method Monitoring time 2000 ms Totalstations 4 z Points Start Start End A ee Switch screens LB LW settings z Station No Specify reserved station 2 Equally assigning LX LY1000 to 117F 384 points to the I O ranges between the I O master station and station number 2 to 4 Equal assignment 3 Select Equal assignment and enter following values F Start station 2 Equal assignment we LX LY settings 1 End station 4 M station gt L station equal assignment jM station lt L station equal assignment Start No 1000 Start station 2 Station Start station 2 Station End station 4 Station End station 4 Station Start No 1000 Start No 1000 C Identical point assignment Points Total points assigned 384 Total points assigned 384 Total points assigned 384 Devices are equally assigned in the LX LY setting 1 field of the Network range assignment screen Network range assignment Network range assignment oe Monitoring time 2000 ms Switch screens LX LY settings 1 Total stations 4 C Points Stat Start End xX Start 1000 1080 1100 Specify 1 0 master station Specify reserved station i Equal assignment Supplementary setting Clear creck end
193. h salarar eae un iadeyade aavahalara areca sage aracnnaile 11 1 1141 A Interlock related signals et eee re ee eee ee ee TETEE ETETETT ETETETT eee ee eee Ce ee ee eee Tel 11 1 11 2 Cyclic Transmission re ere eRe ee enero e rice ieee ee eer re eee re ee ere eee ere nT eee ere eee ee eee ee eer 1 1 3 11 2 1 Station based block data ASSULANCE vor tnt enter es 11 2 4 11 3 Link Special Relays SB and Link Special Registers SW ernie Sie aiesajeiaeiaye Wine ara Sie ie afei anaiela anette aaa 11 5 CHAPTER 12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 12 1to 12 21 12 1 Transient Transmission Function antenna ncn ata Sa fee tesa tated ntaraied ay atten dave ace asal afniinenysicaek tin dawadtataackvat ata ainnavs taindacataentasaiataun nein nin ata atat ares 12 2 12 1 1 Communication function Fesisecteresctesstesesteesenestseesesetecastetectseteeeetetesetesstseceteesevasteeesests 12 3 121 2 Routing function sina yn ata atau a at aa w a cuca ete tae cea tein Bata sar et atemania ata uw A a alata ate a what teeta ww aaa eset 12 a 6 12 1 3 Group function Tire rr cre ce oe Leer ec eer Te eee Cee e rc ee ere ere Le he ere ee te 125 15 12 1 4 SEND RECV function TEETER calle muacaya Panacea pasar asd aracecacua cara aeSraturard osanaya avd qual eeu rava woavacuface wiacawus a G e e ares etana ecu Geaanuaaracapaea 12 es 16 12 2 Event Setting Function a iabaasai a tink ay nC enscav ious init en etntaate sn fn n iann facutin ain dans euab nok toon lava iain chute arnicadetas
194. he CC IE Control utility screen and its operating methods Q80BD J71GP21 SX and the CC IE Control utility installed under Windows XP Professional Operating System are used for screen explanations x POINT Log on as a user having administrator authority 8 1 Overview CC IE Control utility consists of following functions 1 Board information display Monitors operating information and hardware information of the CC Link IE Controller Network board 2 Parameter settings Set various parameters of the CC Link IE Controller Network board 3 Diagnostics Displays link status of network and status of each station 8 1 Overview 8 1 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES oe 5 c e 8 o 8 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 1 1 List of functions The following table explains the functions of the CC IE Control utility Function Description Reference Monitors operating information and hardware information of the CC Board list Section 8 3 1 Board Link IE Controller Network board information Channel confirm Confirm channel numbers that are set to each station Section 8 3 2 display Board detail Displays detail information on the CC Link IE Controller Network Section 8 3 3
195. he CC Link IE Controller a Network board The settings are required only for the control station The data of the network range assignment are sent from the control station to normal gt stations at start up of the network r The network range assignment settings are set on the Network range assignment screen a in the CC IE Control utility Ei CF Section 8 4 2 Network range assignment screen DS Network range assignment D Network range assignment z AA E Pie iata Le Monitoring time ms Total stations 2 x C Points Stat Start End ae eas ee lt LB LW setting 1 5 LB W m _ Points Stat End Points Start End Oo oi ana Es aA a icp 6 5 z 5 p O maste Specify reserved station Equal assignment Supplementary setting Clear 3 Cancel ae Zo ae N yoz 3v0 TEF AWE Item Description Reference S R Total stations Set a number of total stations in the network Section 6 3 3 Zug Assignment method Select the assignment method of LB LW and LX LY 6 Switch screens Select a target of the range assignment LB LW settings 1 Set the send ranges for each station in which LB LW Section 6 3 1 ection 6 3 LB LW settings 2 are used for the LB LW communication K W LX LY settings 1 Set the I O ranges of LX LY by blocks for the I O fe z master station used for the LX LY communication Section 6 3 2 lt E LX LY settings 2 i eal and between the I O station and relevant station an Set a value for monitoring time
196. he first installation me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair Click Conti nue Anyway button or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly The operation test has been conducted by Mitsubishi recommends that you stop this installation now and Sontact the software vendor for software that has Problems do not occur after the installation passed Windows Logo testing The following screen may appear behind another screen Then press the Alt Tab keys to bring it to the front Continue Anyway Security Alert Driver Installation E xi The driver software you are installing for WinDriver has not been properly signed with Authenticode T M technology Therefore Windows cannot tell if the software has been modified since it was published The publisher s identity cannot be verified because of a problem The installed INF file does not contain digital signature information Do you still want to install this driver software More Info For Windows Server 2003 R2 one of the screens shown on the left is displayed at the first installation Security Alert Driver Installation ay x Click the Yes button A The driver software you are installing for WinDriver has not been properly signed with Authenticode TM technology Therefore Windows canno
197. he secure desktop when p E User Account Contr Vitus fle and registry wrtefaiure Er EEEE Security Setting gt gt tab and click the administrators in Admin Approval 4 Setting completion App 37 Appendix 9 Warning Message Appears on Windows Appendix 9 2 Methods for preventing the warning message OK 8 Select Elevate without prompting on the lt lt Local button APPENDICES MELSEC Appendix 10 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup CC Link IE Controller Network board does not support the power save mode standby hibernate sleep and fast startup The following explains the behavior of the personal computer when the personal computer enters each mode Appendix 10 1 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode standby hibernate 1 Target operating system The following operating systems have the power save mode standby hibernate e Windows XP e Windows Server 2003 R2 2 Behavior when entering the standby mode hibernation mode When the personal computer enters the power save mode standby hibernate the following message appears and the power save mode standby hibernate is disabled The CC Link IE Controller Network board continues its operation and the data link remains normal lt When entering the standby mode gt System Standby Failed D The device driver For the
198. iP ogee ererat s i nE EREA EANES AEAEE AEAEE nents 5 18 552 HAN tester E E E eee eee eee 5 19 553 Self loopback cc 5 20 5 5 4 Creu test 0s eee abe heeded a AA deed 5 22 5 55 Station to station EST cc nn rrr errr nirnnnrte 5 25 5 56 Communication test Aon Ene rn rr rr EAEE 5 27 CHAPTER 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS 6 1to 6 25 6 1 Parameter Settings Board Information Settings sss iy 6 2 6 2 Parameter Setting Example srr nn irerirrtitrer EENEN 6 8 6 3 Network Range Assignment Settings 111trrrrrrrrrrrr rr eiriitii riiy 6 9 6 3 1 LB LW settings strc rrr ri in nicccccerirreriiirer rity 6 10 6 3 2 LXILY settings errr rrtt rrtt t ttt AEAEE in crreccererriirrtr ttt 6 13 6 3 3 Total number of link stations ccc neasa a AEA 6 15 6 3 4 Specifying I O master station 1i irri rrr nner 6 15 6 3 5 Specifying reserved stations viii ir rine 6 16 6 4 Equal Assignment Settings svi i iiinriitieeerees 6 17 6 5 Routing Parameter Settings 1vrtrcc i EEEE EEEE EEEE 6 20 6 6 Supplementary Settings sss ice ire 6 21 6 7 Driver Settings srr irri iniiiiiiiriiiiireerregs 6 22 6 8 Event Settings cir irri ineiiiiiiiiirerrregs 6 23 6 9 Target Settings ee Se eae ee Re eo ae ea we we ee Re eae ew wwe 6 e 24 6 10 Refresh Parameter Setting aananeaananananaaanananaanananatanananaanananananananaseananananaaanatanuaaaaanadananaanena 6 25 CHAPTER7 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES 7 1to7 5 TA Installation and Uninstallation Precautions
199. ia ewal with Advanced Security Bi Network List Manager Policies Network name icon and location group policies PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 6 Select Security Options 9 4 X3lbs IB Security Settings Name ra Description gt B Account Policies T Audit Policy Audit Policy gt i Local Posies EA User Rights Assignmert User Rights Assignment gt E Windows Firewall with Advanced See ap EE Network List Manager Policies gt E Public Key Policies gt E Software Restriction Policies gt E Application Control Policies gt P Security Policies on Local Compute gt E Advanced Audit Policy Configuration ERROR CODES 4 To the next page gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 9 Warning Message Appears on Windows App 36 Appendix 9 2 Methods for preventing the warning message APPENDICES TTC ELSE From the previous page File Action View 7 Select User Account Control Behavior of the elevation oo TEXG alae prompt for administrators in Admin Approval Mode Prompt for consent gt 1B IP Security Policies on Local Compute B b E Advanced Audit Policy Configuration count Contr Detect application install count Control Only elevate executables iccount Control Only elevate UlAccess applications E User Account Control Run all administrators in Admin Appt Ena T User Account Control Switch to t
200. ic data are assured per station by handshaking between the personal computer and CC Link IE Controller Network board and executing the link refresh For details refer to the following Section 11 2 1 Station based block data assurance 11 3 11 2 Cyclic Transmission 1 1 PROGRAMMING 11 2 1 Station based block data assurance x Block data are assured per station by handshaking between the personal computer and ao CC Link IE Controller Network board and executing the link refresh Station based block data assurance link data separation prevention by each station is e executed by the handshake of cyclic data This function can be set in the Parameter setting Supplementary setting screen of the CC IE Control utility only when the CC Link IE Controller Network board is the control z station It cannot be set if the CC Link IE Controller Network board is a normal station Be Lu Supplementary setting 22 11 Constant scan 500 ms Block data assurance per station Transient setting PROGRAMMING V Punctuality is guaranteed Maximum No of transients in one station 2 Times ZZ og By selecting Block data assurance per station is available an interlock is not needed for 32 the link data between the setting stations ae lt i Personal computer internal buffer CC Link IE Controller Network board CPU module link register W CC Link IE Controller Network module link registe
201. ick the Next button Click Next to continue 14 8 14 2 Troubleshooting of Installation Uninstallation 14 2 3 When the corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective at installation 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Screen Corrective action oc Found New Hardware Wizard 2 Welcome to the Found New 5 Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for W Network Cortroler The Found New Hardware Wizard screen is displayed after the board 25 F gt P f me Si iyaa san oh ch watlishiaa installation Refer to Section 14 2 4 and install the driver o2 ES or floppy disk insert it now E tai 2 2 When the utility has been started up restart the utility after installing the What do you want the wizard to do i a ee ea eens driver x Z lt Click Next to continue lt o gt Lu oe Ti onl 14 2 4 When the driver is not installed The driver is installed automatically when installing the board on the personal computer a after installing the software package z Sask For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 R2 the following operation is required g X Found New Hardware Wizard i 4 n F jah Welcome to the Found New 1 The Found New Hardware Wizard screen is displayed after Marware Wizard installing the board and starting up the personal computer This wizard helps you install software for Network Controler Select Install from a list or
202. ient transmission using the 5 network configuration on the previous page g i W gt In the table below O and x indicate whether the transient transmission 25 between the request source destination listed in the column at the left and the a5 request destination source listed in the row at the bottom is possible For example the transient transmission from 9Ns2 of network number 9 to 1Ns2 g of network number 1 is O 1 z Q Qk Request source oNs2 7 Seog es On QS target pal gs 1Ns2 Request target source Z Own 5 1Mr1 station i 1Ns2 Own Network No 1 a Station om 2 1Ns3 station ins OIOI Qe amet enl eon a Network No 2 2Ns2 O O O em z z 2N3 O OO 0 Eton az Own 275 3Me1 O O O O O OJO sation IL Network No 3 3N2 OlOlOlolol ol olo gm 3Ns3 O O O O n O liton N W Q O oO a z amet olololololiolo lojlolo bane 4 8Ns2 O O O O0 O O0 0 O0 0 seron Network No 8 a 8Ns3 O O O O O0 0 O0 0 0 0 station 9 ans4 OloOlojojojojojojojo cation 5 m1 o ololololololololo o gmn ol olen z Network No 9 9Ns2 X Oxi xlolololololo oloololo Sm ons xox x olofo olofo foloJofole lo jaa 3 ke Request source 4Me1 1Ns2 1Ns3 1Ns4 2Me1 2Nc2 2Ns3 3Me1 3Ns2 3Ns3 8Me1 8Ns2 8Ns3 8Ns4 9Me1 9Ns2 9Ns3 target fa ee had Network No 1 Network No 2 Network
203. ination to save Failed to save the file Confirm the destination to save e Check the free space of the storage location e Check the media of the storage location e The total number of characters for the storage location and file name should be less than 128 e Check the free space of the storage location e Check the media of the storage location e The total number of characters for the storage location and file name should be less than 128 Specified file pass exceeds 255 characters Please specify it again Specify the file pass within the 255 characters Failed to write parameters The probable causes are e A Windows logon user does not have administrator authority e The operating system is faulty Check if Windows is logged on as an administrator authorized user e Check the H W failure on the CC Link IE Controller Network board An error occurred in CC Link IE Controller Network board X during reset Error code XXXX The probable causes are e CC Link IE Controller Network board is not mounted properly e CC IE Control utility is not installed properly 13 3 e Check whether the CC Link IE Controller Network board is installed properly The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B 13 1 List of Error Messages in CC IE Control Utility 13 1 2 Error messages displayed on the setting screen 1 3 ERROR CODES 2 Network range assignme
204. information board Set various parameters of the CC Link IE Controller Network board Section 8 4 1 Network range Set the cyclic transmission ranges of link devices LB LW LX and LY f Section 8 4 2 assignment that can be sent by each station Assign link devices LB LW LX and LY in identical points or equal Equal assignment Section 8 4 3 points Routing parameter Set parameters that are necessary for executing a transient Sddions d ection 8 4 setting transmission to other network stations in the multiple network system Parameter Set constant link scan time block data assurance per station Supplementary settings Hi punctuality assurance and maximum number of transients in one Section 8 4 5 settin 3 station Driver setting Set WDT monitoring time and time out time Section 8 4 6 Set parameters that are necessary for notifying events to the user Event setting Section 8 4 7 program when link devices are changed Target setting Set logical station numbers for accessing to other network CPUs Section 8 4 8 Refresh parameter Set refresh ranges for the refresh data storage area and CC Link IE Section tae ection 8 4 setting Controller Network driver buffer Displays link status of network and status of each station Section 8 5 1 Communication ae Displays a path to the specified station Section 8 5 2 es Diagnostics z a Link start stop Starts and stops data linking of the specified s
205. information screen Section 8 4 6 Driver setting screen 2 Set the refresh parameter as link devices for monitoring are included in the refresh range If they are not included in the refresh range events are notified but the devices for monitoring cannot be accessed Section 8 4 9 Refresh parameter setting screen 3 For details of the functions refer to the following manual K5 MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 12 2 Event Setting Function 1 2 21 DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY ye PROGRAMMING z F q0 OF ae Es tu ERROR CODES APPENDICES TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX 1 3 ERROR CODES CHAPTER 13 ERROR CODES This chapter explains error codes and error messages returned when errors occur For error codes of the MELSEC data link library functions refer to the following manual K MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 13 1 List of Error Messages in CC IE Control Utility The following explains the corrective actions to error messages in the CC IE Control utility 1 Common error message Error message Corrective action An error occurred in communication with the CC Link IE Refer to the error code of MELSEC Data Link Library Controller Network board of board X Reference Manual and take a corrective action Error code XX XXXXH corresponding to the error code 1 3 1 13 1 List of Error Messages in CC IE Control Utility 1 3 ERROR CODES
206. ing parameter button on the Parameter setting screen u CF Section 8 4 1 Parameter setting screen It is used to set the target network number relay network number and relay station number gt O g EJPOINT 1 The routing parameters are commonly used with channel numbers from 151 Ei O to 154 They cannot be set for each channel number HO 2 Up to 64 routine parameters can be set 2 zA s O Routing parameter setting d Target network Relay network Relay station o N mE feces fee O W ja n n za O Maximum size of transient transmission when relaying other networks O Channel No 151 960Words 480Words 3 Channel No 152 C 960Words 480Words uw anh i 154 C sue o Pei 960 words setting can be set when the relay station and target station of wu transient transmission which relayed other network No are the MELSEC Q gt series modules D Clear Check Ce Cancel 5 oc e 2O RE Item Description Default Setting range 8 Set the target network numbers These numbers Target network No No setting 1 to 239 cannot be overlapped Set the first relay network number in the path to ou Relay network No No setting 1 to 239 lt O the transfer target On Set the first relay station in the path to the EDE Relay station No No setting 1 to 120 OOF transfer target Cre QF wA a ae ei ranieri Set the maximum transmission size 960 words Tug TE p 480 words for each channel number when 960 word
207. ion Request target 1Me1 4Ns64 2Me1 2Ns64 Cc Link IE Controller Network E g MELSECNET H D IOSIA 1Ns65 QCPU Universal model QCPU Request source 2 When the relay station number of the CC Link IE Controller Network is 65 or higher Accessible with the following conditions e The request source is the Universal model QCPU or CC Link IE Controller Network board e The relay station of the CC Link IE Controller Network is the Universal model QCPU Request source 4Me1 2Ns64 Co Link IE Controller OG E g MELSECNET H 2 MNs120 AINSGOMmeNienm 1Ns64 QCPU Universal model QCPU Relay station Request target ES POINT The CC Link IE Controller Network board cannot be used as a relay station Use the network module connected to the programmable controller CPU for the relay station 1 2 6 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 12 1 2 Routing function 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
208. ion 2 5 Section 7 2 Section 9 3 Section 9 4 Section 14 3 2 Japanese Manual Version SH 080690 S This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual A 12 2007 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION PRECAUTIONS FOR USE 1 2 3 4 Interlink transfer and routing functions The CC Link IE Controller Network board cannot be used as a relay station for the interlink transfer function or the routing function To use these functions set a network module as a relay station A personal computer equipped with PCI bus slot and PCI Express slot When CC Link IE Controller Network board Q80BD J71GP21 SX Q80BD J71GP21S SX supported with PCI bus is installed on a personal computer which has both PCI bus slot and PCI Express slot link refresh time may be long compared to when using a personal computer which has only PCI bus slot Restrictions for functions depending on the personal computer or the operating system There are some restrictions for the functions or supported version depending on the operating system or personal computer to be used KF Section 2 5 Operating Environment Driver installation and updating Do not install or update the driver o
209. ional Operating System Service Pack 4 or later PCI Express bus specifications Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise x64 Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System Operating system Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard Operating System j 2 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard x64 Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise x64 Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Mic
210. ions 1000BASE SX MMF optical fiber cable Standard IEC60793 2 10 Types Ata 1 50 125 um multimode Transmission loss max 3 5 dB km or less 4 850nm Transmission band min 500 MHz km or more 850nm Connector specifications Duplex LC connector Standard IEC61754 20 Type LC connector Connection loss 0 3 dB or less Polished surface PC Physical Contact polishing Laser class IEC 60825 1 3 2 3 2 Performance Specifications Class 1 laser product 3 SPECIFICATIONS Specification Q80BD J71GP21 SX Q80BD J71GP21S SX Q81BD J71GP21 SX Q81BD J71GP21S SX Number of boards that Up to 4 i can be installed ais ft Occupied slots 1 slot 3 PCI bus slot or PCI X slot PCI Express x1 x2 x4 x8 x16 slot Installation slot Half size Half size Z Voltage DC20 4 to DC31 2V DC20 4 to DC31 2V z Current 0 27A 0 27A Connector set Connector set ao Connector EE accessory accessory o Applicable 0 50 to 1 25mm 0 50 to 1 25mm 3 cable size AWG20 16 AWG20 16 External Allowable a No external power No external power power momentary 2 9 supply function ims level PS1 supply function ims level PS1 supply power failure time D a Noise voltage 500Vp p Noise voltage 500Vp p v Neie Noise width 14s Noise width 14s dubii by the a simulator
211. is screen from being displayed refer to Appendix 9 8 4 8 2 Operating Procedure 8 2 1 Starting the utility 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 2 2 Ending the utility MELSEC To end the CC IE Control utility select the Close button at the bottom of the board list screen start screen sW CC JE Control utility Channel No Network No Group No Station No ype 8 2 3 Displaying manual This manual is displayed by clicking the Manual button on the bottom of the Board list screen start screen 8 2 Operating Procedure 8 2 2 Ending the utility 8 5 CC IE Control 8 CC IE Control UTILITY MELSEC 8 2 4 Checking the version information To check the version information of the CC IE Control utility click the Fi icon on the board list screen start screen and click Version information in the system menu Move Minimize Xx Close Alt F4 Device monitor utility Version information Click i Version information 8 6 8 2 Operating Procedure 8 2 4 Checking the version information 8 CC IE Control UTILITY MELSEC 8 3 Board Information Screens if This section explains about the screens which display the parameter information and gt online status of the CC Link IE Controller Network board gt 8 3 1 Board list screen 6 The board list screen is displayed containing the own station information of the CC Link IE z C
212. itor time value in one byte Specify the value for the communication monitor time within lt 6 number within the range from 1 to 100 the range of 1 to 100 a2 As the number of network to specified destination station Set the number of networks to the specified destination SE exceeds 8 the result cannot be shown station within the range 1 3 The inward and outward paths are different Check routing Check the settings of the routing parameter parameter setting As relay station information to specified destination station is o Check the settings of the routing parameter o incorrect the result cannot be shown K re Wu TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX 13 1 List of Error Messages in CC IE Control Utility 13 8 13 1 3 Error messages displayed on the diagnostics screen 1 3 ERROR CODES 3 Link start stop screen Error message Corrective action Target station is not selected After selecting execute it again Select the target station Network type cannot be retrieved e Set the network parameters correctly e Restart the CC IE Control utility e The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B Station information retrieval failed e Set the network parameters correctly e Restart the CC IE Control utility e The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B Retrieval of station No and group No of the connecting station f
213. k IE Controller Network Reference Manual 1Ns3 2Mp1 1 i i C Network No 1 i Network No 2 p 1 ee L 1Mp1 1Ns2 2Ns2 2Ns3 Request Request source target Function execution Function completion Personal computer processing time of l 4 7 request source VA pe Link scan on request source side H ia Link scan on request 4 target side Sequence scan of fam X r request target side When more than two networks are relayed using the routing function add the processing time from one relay station to the other relay station to the routing transmission delay time 1 2 14 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 12 1 2 Routing function 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS i l 5 MELSEC 12 1 3 Group function x This function specifies transient transmission target stations as a group and transmits data a to all stations in a group with a single transient transmission One network can be divided into up to 32 groups ere This function is used for the Network diagnostics on the CC Link IE Controller Network board z 1 Visual representation of the function A O The following figure shows an example of the group function When the transient PS transmission is executed specifying group No 1 by 1Ns2 all of the three stations gs 1Ns3 1Ns5 and 1Ns6 can read the
214. l External power supply status of the own station B0042H Communication status between CC Link IE SB0020H SW0020H Controller Network board and personal computer Setting status of the CC Link IE Controller Network board SB0040h to 00441 SB005Cu SBOO05Dh SBO060H SBOO0COnH SW0040u to 0046n SW0054 to 005Dn SW0063h SWOO0COu to 00C7H Running status of the CC Link IE Controller Network board 2 Information on the entire network SB0047H to 00491 SW0047H to 004AH CPU and personal computer status of each SB0100H SW0100h to 01074 station normal abnormal B0110H SW0110n to 0117H CPU and personal computer operating status of SBOOFOn SWOOFO0h to OOF7H each station RUN STOP Cyclic transmission status of each station SBOOBOuH SWOOBOnk to 00B7H External power supply status of each station SB0047H SW0190h to 0197H Communication mode SBOO060H SW0063H SB0054n to 0056n SW0054i to 0057n Setting status of the network SBO005Cu 005Du SB0060H SBOOCOH SW0059 to 005Du SWOO0COu to 00C7H Running status of the network SBOOAOH SWOOAOh to 00A7H Line status SB0064H to 0065H 11 3 Link Special Relays SB and Link Special Registers SW SW0065n SW0070h to 0071p SW0080h to 0081H 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS Basic functions Cyclic transmission function Communication by LB LW DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY P
215. l Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC CCBD2 Version 1 15R or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC MNETG B Version 1 17T or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC CCIEF B Version 1 06G or later When SW1DNC CCIEF B Version 1 02C or later is installed MELSEC Data Link Library Programmer s Reference is deleted T INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES MELSEC c Driver When installing the board on the personal computer after the installation of the software package the driver is installed automatically gt 1 For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 R2 the driver is required to be specified on the gt Found New Hardware Wizard screen Section 14 2 4 When the driver installation is completed normally the following driver isdisplayed 6 Ke on the Device Manager screen of Windows Dg Device Driver 2 6 PCI MELSECNET G Controller or MELSECNET G Device MELSEC CC Link IE Control Controller 12 d Service application E To prevent a personal computer entering the power save mode hibernate sleep lt MELSECPowerManager is installed automatically under the specific operating i system a For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to the following section K5 Appendix 11 3 When installation is aborted or failed 9 When the installation is
216. lecting the menu Select Setting Device setting se z 2 Setting screen Q A ri P Pa For Batch monitor For 16 point register monitor 9 t ae Go Device Setting a Device r Device Type Device Type Device Type LW direct link register zl Device Type JER extension file register mo Network No 1 Block No oO i Z DeviceNo z HEX CDEC CocT 00000000 DeviceNo E 0 C HEX DEC OCT 0 O E Register Device List ee Bit device Word device Double Word device X 0000 Lw1 00000000 o EZ qO OF O EZ E ctu Item Description Set a type of devices to be monitored icp e Enter a block number for ER S Device Type O Enter a network number for LX LY LB LW LSB and LSW o e Enter a value of start I O number divided by 16 in decimal for SPG o 4 Set the start number of the device to be monitored i Device No HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal Register Device List Displays a list of registered devices S He Setting Register the items set in Device Type and Device No then add it to the Register Device List 3 ip Change Select the device to be changed and click this button to change the registered data Delete Select the device to be deleted and click this button to delete it from the Register Device List 1 The number of displayed columns will differ depending on the settings of a co
217. led Refer to Section 14 2 2 The driver is not normally installed 8 A mark is displayed next to the icon of the driver on the Device Refer to Section 14 3 3 Manager screen 1 Start Windows Task Manager Windows standard function and select the application of high CPU utilization on the lt lt Performance gt gt or lt lt Processes gt gt 2 Reduce the operation frequency Load of the PC CPU is heavy performance of the application of high i e The application of high CPU utilization is in operation CPU utilization 3 When interrupts from the CC Link IE 14 2 14 1 Cause Determination Methods for Each Trouble Controller Network board are frequent reduce the frequency For example set a longer event occurrence interval using the event function 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 Trouble description The User Account Control screen is displayed when the utility is activated A Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before E 1 MnetgUtl exe Unidentified Publisher To continue type an administrator password and then click OK gt A A Caps Lockis on Details Cancel User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer Sieh Program name MnetgUtl exe Verified publisher Unknown File origin Hard drive on this computer To continue type an administrator password and then click Yes it Show details
218. les of 16 LX Start 0000 to 1FFO multiples of 16 End OOOF to 1FFF multiples of 16 1 Points 16 to 8192 multiples of 16 LY Start 0000 to 1FFO multiples of 16 End OOOF to 1FFF multiples of 16 1 4 Applicable points for LB LW per station depend on the setting of the network type Network type Device Max link points per station CC IE Control Control station LB LB 16K points 16384 points CC IE Control Normal station LW LW 16K points 16384 points CC IE Control Extended mode Control station LB LB 32K points 32768 points CC IE Control Extended mode Normal station LW LW 128K points 131072 points 8 16 8 4 Setting Screen 8 4 2 Network range assignment screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 4 3 Equal assignment screen This screen is displayed by clicking the Equal assignment button on the Network range M fiz assignment screen g CF Section 8 4 2 Network range assignment screen It is used to set the network range assignment for each station in identical points or equal points 2 o LB LW setting LX LY setting lt Equal assignment Equal assignment z 3 e eena aana 16 Lone Identical point assignment 16 Points Cancel oZ r no C Equal assignment Equal assignment LB LW settings 1 LX LY settings 1 LB equal assignment LW equal assignment M station gt L station equal assignment M station lt L statio
219. lowing Select diagnostics destination screen is On A P A vaz displayed before displaying the CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result Boe screen Sec Select the target network for diagnostics e Select diagnostics destination g Select network S Board1 CC IE Control Channel No 151 Network No 1 Z o 2 rs C Board2 CC IE Control Channel No 152 Network No 1 g a g Boards 296 C Boardd B26 250 oe Cancel g 5 c o 8 w oO O 8 5 Diagnostics Screen 8 29 8 5 1 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY Item Change board MELSEC Description Displays the Select diagnostics destination screen when two or more CC Link IE Controller Network boards are installed in the personal computer Change the target network for diagnostics Select station Changes to the entered station number by clicking the Change select station button The status of the selected station is displayed in the Select station network device status display field Change select station Set the selected station that is entered in the Select station field Start monitor Starts updating the CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen Stop monitor Stops updating the CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen Network info display field Refer to 1 in this section
220. lues of the communication function 5 Chapter 13 2 When error cannot be solved If the troubleshooting above does not help refer to Section 14 9 LGOTA ONE Y ERROR CODES APPENDICES INDEX 14 1 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 1 Cause Determination Methods for Each Trouble When a trouble occurs refer to the table below for methods to determine the cause No Trouble description Determination method Action The CC Link IE Controller Network board did not normally operate at start up 1 Refer to Section 14 3 When executing a user program system down blue screen or system reset occurred on the operating system Although the CC Link IE Controller Network board control station and 2 Refer to the flowchart in Section 14 5 normal stations were connected the data link failed An error occurred during data link 1 An unexpected value is input to a specific link device B W X Y 2 Data cannot be written or read even though device access was i 3 a o Refer to the flowchart in Section 14 6 made using communication function in the user program 3 Communications are occasionally disabled while the user program is executed 4 The external power supply function did not correctly operate Refer to Section 14 7 5 Action for Driver WDT error Refer to Section 14 8 6 The software is not normally installed Refer to Section 14 2 1 7 The software is not normally uninstal
221. made to 257 or more stations simultaneously communication path may not be automatically switched Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System App 8 DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY APPLICATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING ERROR CODES gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC The following table explains details of the special relay and special registers to be monitored when estimating the occurrence of path switching No Name Description Description details e Turns ON when an error occurs by redundant system error OFF No error SM1600 Other system error flag ON E check Turns ON when any of bits for SD1600 turns ON Error e Remains OFF when no errors are present e Any of the following bits turns on corresponding to the No of the module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in own system e Turned OFF by the system after the error of the relevant No of module for No of module for module is resolved by the user which system which system ce a oe ere n 3 P r 3 3 SD1590 0 0 1 EAK 0 1 0 1 ON switching request is switching request is z SD1590 i i Module No 0 Disabled since a CPU issued from the issued from the module uses two slots network module in own network module in own eer ee system system Module No 11 Rightmost module on 1 2 slot base u
222. meter setting for the control station LX OH to 1FFFH 8192 points By OH to 1FFFH 8192 points 2 2 Single Network System 2 2 2 Setting items The ranges for each CC Link IE Controller Network board and network module need to be assigned in the parameter setting for the control station 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 3 Multi Network System A multi network system is composed of multiple networks that are connected by relay stations 4 POINT 1 Any network No can be set within the range of 1 to 239 2 The CC Link IE Controller Network board cannot be used as a relay station Use a network module as a relay station OVERVIEW N z Q lt a 9 cs z e iS SYSTEM 2 3 1 Configuration In the following example two networks are connected Control station Normal station Control station Normal station 1Me1 1Ns2 2Mr1 2Ns2 r E Q80BD J71GP21 SX SPECIFICATIONS acpu a71 QJ71 GP21 SX GP21 SX F Q80BD J71GP21 SX Power supply Network No 1 Network No 2 FUNCTIONS QCPU QJ71 GP21 SX QCPU QJ71 GP21 SX Normal station 2Ns3 Normal station 1Ns3 Power supply Power supply PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING
223. n of own station other than own The TETE computer 3 status baton cyclic station cyclic power sate pass status 2 transmission transmission status status Loop Personal computer shut down Driver completion Driver completion Before personal computer restart ON Normal Normal Normal Normal Personal computer restart 7 Before CC Link IE Controller Network board driver start up CC Link IE Controller Network board 7 7 T am f ON Normal Normal Normal Normal 4 driver in operation After CC Link IE Controller Network 9 f ON Normal Normal Normal Normal board driver start up 4 The status can be checked on the lt lt Monitor detail gt gt tab on the Logging screen of the CC IE Control utility on the Network diagnostics of GX Developer connected to other station s programmable controller or at special registers 2 The status can be checked on the board list Start up screen of the CC IE Control utility on the Network diagnostics of GX Developer connected to other station s programmable controller or at special registers Baton pass status of each station SWOOA0 to SWO00A7 3 The status can be checked at the Select station network device status display on the CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result of the CC IE Control utility on the Network diagnostics of GX Developer connected to other station s programmable controller or at special registers Cyclic tra
224. n 3 2 Performance Specifications APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 4 Comparison with the MELSECNET H Board App 24 Appendix 4 4 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES Appendix 4 6 Comparison of the data link library functions The following table explains the comparison of the MELSEC data link library functions which can be used both CC Link IE Controller Network and MELSECNET H software packages CC Link IE Controller Network Function MELSECNET H Function name mdOpen Opens a communication line O O mdClose Closes a communication line O O Batch writes devices Extended function O on mdSendEx Sends data SEND function Extended function Oo x Batch reads devices Extended function O on mdReceiveEx Receives data RECV function Extended function gz x mdRandWEx Writes devices randomly Extended function O o mdRandREx Reads devices randomly Extended function O g mdDevSetEx Sets a bit device Extended function O g mdDevRstEx Resets a bit device Extended function O H1 mdTypeRead Reads the type of programmable controller CPU O O ed Remote operation of programmable controller CPU O O RUN STOP PAUSE mdWaitBdEvent Waits for an event occurrence O x mdBdRst Resets the board O O mdBdModSet Sets the mode of the board O O mdBdModRead Reads the mode of the board O O mdBdLedRead Reads the LED information
225. n OUT side Baton path error in own station Cable disconnected Number of path switch 0 Data link stop factor Data link monitoring timer time up Eror factor The data link monitoring time has been exceeded Troubleshooting Change the data link monitoring time currently set to a value greater than the current link scan time Or change the constant link scan time setting value to a value smaller than the data link monitoring time 8 5 Diagnostics Screen 8 5 1 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen MELSEC 8 35 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES oe re c o 8 o 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 5 2 Communication test screen This screen is displayed by clicking the Communication test button on the CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen Section 8 5 1 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen It is used to display the path from the own station to specified communication target and check whether the transient transmission can be routed correctly in the network Communication Test Communication test details 1 Destination 2 Communication data Network No Length 100 B
226. n a channel number is changed on the Parameter setting screen of the CC o IE Control utility bz The channel numbers 151 to 154 can be assigned on the Parameter setting screen of the CC IE Control utility 5 Section 8 4 1 Note that the same channel number cannot be assigned to the multiple boards a The set channel number becomes valid after completing the setting c When an additional CC Link IE Controller Network board is installed S The unused channel number within 151 to 154 is automatically assigned in the g order of PCI slot number to the additional CC Link IE Controller Network board 2 installed to the personal computer lt Assigning board numbers in the CC IE Control utility gt Board 1 to 4 displayed on the start screen of the CC IE Control utility Section 2 8 3 1 are the numbers assigned to the boards in the CC IE Control utility 5 The positions of actually installed boards can be checked by the LED display on the ma Channel No confirm screen Section 8 3 2 The numbers 1 to 4 are assigned to the boards in the order of the channel numbers Ai 151 to 154 which are set at the start up of the personal computer 45 In order to change a channel number corresponding to Board 1 to 4 change the voz channel number on the Parameter setting screen lt Section 8 4 1 and restart Zs the personal computer She The following shows the example of board assignment when two boards are installe
227. n equal assignment Start station Station Start station Station Statt station Station Start station Station End station Station End station Station End station Station End station Station ia Statt No Start No Start No Statt No E Total points assigned Total points assigned Total points assigned Total points assigned 5 o m O W D Item Description Default Setting range Select when assigning devices for each station in Identical point identical points to the selected device setting in the Checked Checked ecke assignment Switch screens field of the network range Unchecked a assignment screen 5 LB LW 16 to 16384 3 m Points Set points for Identical point assignment No setting LX LY 16 to 8192 units of 16 points w gt Select when equally dividing the entered total points eked 5 ead i cke Equal assignment of assignment and assigning to link devices for each Unchecked S 5 a i Unchecked e station ay 7 s arg Start station Set the start station for Equal assignment No setting 1 to 120 g End station Set the end station for Equal assignment No setting 1 to 120 Tz Set the start number of link devices for Equal Range Start No No setting o 9 assignment indicated by ee lt O Total points i Range ni Set the total points of assignment No setting 9 yas assigned indicated by 20e Executes Equal assignment according to the S R OK settings and closes the Equal assignment screen e Without
228. n size 960 words transmission when of transient transmission 480 words relaying other networks Routing parameter setting Target network Relay network Relay station Maximum size of transient transmission when relaying other networks Channel No 151 C 960Words 480 Words Channel No 152 960 Words 480 Words Channel No 153 960 Words 480 Words Channel No 154 960Words 480 Words 960 words setting can be set when the relay station and target station of transient transmission which relayed other network No are the MELSEC Q series modules Clear Check Cancel 1 2 8 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 12 1 2 Routing function 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS b Setting method Set the routing parameters according to the procedure described below Request source a C Network No Relay station C Network No O 2 Request target To access the station in Network No O the station No of Network No must be relayed first Target Relay Relay Network No Network No Station No 1 O A 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 12 1 2 Routing function 12 9 DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY z F q0 OF ae Es lt LL
229. nal computer at other stations Y Monitor B X and Y on the personal computer Do the B X and Y turn ON OFF on the personal computer YES Are the monitor No conditions and user YES Review the monitor conditions or user program program normal Replace the CC Link IE Controller Network board since the SD and RD LEDs are failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Did SD RD LEDs turn ON End 14 4 Flowchart when Data Link Failed 14 4 2 Flowchart when SD RD LEDs are OFF 14 18 Normal TROUBLESHOOTING 14 4 3 Flowchart when ERR LED turned ON An error occurred Stop the user program and start the CC IE Control utility Check Present Error on the Board detail information screen lt Section 8 3 3 Board detail information screen Is an error code displayed in the Present Error field For action of the error whose code is displayed on the Present Error refer to the Error Code List in the following manual and resolve the error lt CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Check for the error factor on the CC IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen and follow the instruction of the troubleshooting End 1 For the troubleshooting of CC IE Controller Network diagnostics
230. nchecked Checked ecke REN Displays a Routing parameter setting screen SHS PETAL KE Section 8 4 4 Routing parameter setting screen Board Select a board to edit parameters 1to4 Channel No Set a channel of the target board 151 to 154 8 12 8 4 Setting Screen 8 4 1 Parameter setting screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY MELSEC Item Description Default Setting range CC IE Control Control station ff CC IE Control ee Normal station 3 Network CC IE Control CC IE Control Set a network type of the target board i type Control station Extended mode Control station 6 CC IE Control E Extended mode a o T Normal station gt 6 setting amine Offline H W test g Mode Set a mode of the target board Online Self loopback test 2 Circuit test S Test between station O Bus I F test amp Network No Set a network number of the target board 1 1 to 239 Group No Set a group number of the target board 0 0 to 32 Station No Set a station number of the target board 1 1 to 120 9 Displays the Network range assignment screen 2 Network range assignment Section 8 4 2 Network range assignment Z screen Displays the Driver setting screen fl pOrVeGeeHng Section 8 4 6 Driver setting screen E E Displays the Event setting
231. nction 9 4 Q DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY 9 5 Setting a Monitor Target This section explains the method for setting a programmable controller CPU or CC Link IE Controller Network board to be monitored Set a target when starting the device monitor utility 1 Selecting the menu Select Setting Network setting 2 Setting screen Network Setting Channel 151 CC IE Control 151 CC IE Control 4152 CC IE Control 1153 CC IE Control 154 CC IE Control Own Network S Item Description Channel Set the channel to be used Network Setting Set the own and other stations along with a network number and station number 1 Select the channel number from 151 to 154 when connecting to the CC Link IE Controller Network and select the channel number from 51 to 54 when connecting to the MELSECNET 10 H Es POINT 1 When accessing to the multiple CPU system select the other station and enter 0 for the network number and a value of logical station number which was set in the each utility for the station number 2 When the own station is selected in the network setting network number 0 and station number 255 are displayed as the network status 9 5 9 5 Setting a Monitor Target Q DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY 9 9 6 Setting a Device to be Monitored This section explains the method for setting a device to be monitored DEVICE MONITOR 1 Se
232. nd the application that are installed are different Install the software package SW1DNC MNETG B whose version is the same as that of the installed driver 14 3 When CC Link IE Controller Network Board did not Operate Normally 14 13 14 3 2 Checking on Event Viewer screen DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 1i5Xe 0 8 e lei Y ERROR CODES APPENDICES INDEX 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 For information event The following information event logs other than errors are displayed in the System Log field on the Event Viewer screen The corrective actions are not required for the following events Event No Description Output timing 1024 0400n Driver started normally At driver startup At board reset 1025 0401n Board reset was executed Except for board reset at driver startup 1026 0402n Network range assignment was updated At parameter transmission by control station 1027 0403n State information was updated At driver operation log update 14 14 14 3 When CC Link IE Controller Network Board did not Operate Normally 14 3 2 Checking on Event Viewer screen 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 3 3 Checking on Device Manager screen Check if the board is displayed on the Windows Device Manager screen Item Corrective action The board or driver is not installed DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY If the board is no
233. ng an optical fiber cable hold the connector part of the cable 2 e Make a full connection between the cable side and board side connectors until a S click can be heard T 5 f When installing the CC Link IE Controller Network board to the personal i Aw computer secure a space of around 10 mm 0 39 in to the right and left of the 25 e optical connector Depending on the adjacent boards and installing slot position HA connecting disconnecting the optical cable may be difficult In this case use the age following dedicated tool Sehr Wu Q ano Model name Maker SCT SLM Mitsubishi electric system amp service Co Ltd m TO zZ an o im CC Link IE Controller Network board ay o 9 cA Board side connector 9 Pas lt Q ez Fall Zz te WZ Cable side connector 3 F S i L 239 kK Connector hook CC IE Control UTILITY 5 4 Wiring 5 13 5 4 1 Controller network system 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 2 Cable connection a Connection method Connect an optical fiber cable between OUT and IN as shown below Note that there is no need to connect the cables in the order of station numbers Control station Normal station CC Link IE Normal station CC Link IE Station number 1 Station number 2 Controller Station numbern n lt 120 Controller T Network Network Personal 2 module 3 module com
234. ng status of the CC Link IE Controller Network board RUN ERR O O ce SD RD a When the RUN LED is ON or OFF The same LED display as a network module Name Status Description ON Operating normally One of the following error has occurred BUN OFF Board WDT error Hardware error Board resetting The driver is not started Communication error Confirm the error displayed on Select station network device status ON display on the CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result ERR screen of CC IE Control utility 7 Section 8 5 1 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen OFF Operating normally SD ON Sending data OFF Data not sent RD ON Receiving data OFF Data not received b When the RUN LED is flashing An error which is peculiar to boards has occurred Refer to the troubleshooting and take appropriate measures Name Status Description One of the following error has occurred RUN ON Check ERR LED and RD LED ERR ON PCI bus error has occurred RD ON Driver WDT error has occurred O i When checking channel number The status is displayed as shown below according to the current channel number while opening the Channel No Setting screen Section 8 3 2 lt 151 gt lt 152 gt lt 153 gt lt 154 gt RUN ERR IRUN ERR IRUN ERR IRUN ERR Ol O OJ O OI OJ SD RD SD RD SD RD SD RD
235. nge assignment 1Mp1 1Ns2 1Ns3 1Ns4 LB LW setting Link relay LB LBO to LB1FF Station No 1 LB200 to LB3FF LB400 to LB5FF LB600 to LB7FF LB7FFF l j LWO to LW1FF Station No 1 LW200 to LW3FF No 2 LW400 to LW5FF No 3 LW600 to LW7FF No 4 8 0200 O3FF 0400 _05FF OFF PARAMETER SETTINGS pe ee 6 3 Network Range Assignment Settings 6 11 6 3 1 LB LW settings 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS 6 12 MELSEC b When extending the send range of station No 1 to 1024 points without changing the assignment shown in a LB LW settings 2 Network range assignment 1Mp1 1Ns2 1Ns3 1Ns4 LB LW setting Link relay LB LBO to LB1FF Station No 1 LB200 to LB3FF LB400 to LB5FF No 3 18600 to LB7FF noa ail noa LB800 to LB9FF Not send range f Station No 1 fimin Station No 4 fununu LB7FFF Jj l J Link register LW Station No 1 D N02 Station No 1 Noo Ki Station No 1 HITT No 2 send range qf No3 i b Station No 1 LWo to LwiF Simonne iese erge uni Staton Nox fi inp Saton No LW200 to LW3FF No 2 2 Knnn No 2 send range fimm mmn No2 LW400 to LWSFF mee nos fii nos K ft LW600toLW7FF No4 nf No4 M If No 4 send range LW800 to LW9FF StationNo 1 _______ No 1 send range tmnm Station No 1 i m
236. nit Q312B e For No of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in another system refer to SD1690 e Any of the following bits turns on corresponding to the No of the module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in another system e Turned OFF by the system after the error of the relevant No of module for No of module for module is resolved by the user which system which system b15 tobti ty bi bo ore of ais F er sD1690 0 Jon onlo 40N switching request is switching request is J SD1690 Module No 0 Disabled since a CPU issued from the issued from the module uses two slots network module in network module in Module No 1 Module to the right of a to CPU module another system another system Module No 11 Rightmost module on 12 slot base unit Q312B e For No of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in own system refer to D1590 App 9 Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System APPENDICES MELSEC Appendix 2 Network Status at Power ON OFF and Board Reset During Data Linking Appendix 2 1 Network status at power ON OFF 1 Without the external power supply function When a CC Link IE Controller Network board without the external power supply function Q80BD J71GP21 SX Q81BD J71GP21 SX is used the network status varies depending on the ON OFF status of the personal compute
237. nnection target CPU and display format EIPOINT The only devices that can be monitored using the 16 point register monitor are a ones that have random access capability a If a device that is not capable of random access is specified a device type error 3 will occur For details of the random access capability of each device refer to the following chapter K MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual x W Q zZ 9 6 Setting a Device to be Monitored 9 6 Q DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY 9 7 Changing Word Device Double Word Device Values This section explains the method for changing the specified word device double word device value 1 Selecting the menu Select Device Write Data Changing Continuous change in data 2 Setting screen Data Changing Continuous Change in Data Device Type Device Type Device Type ER extension file register Ke Device Type 5PG special direct buffer register Block No 1 Start O No 16 DEC 2 DeviceNo DeviceNo C HEX DEC C OCT 0 E C HEX DEC C OCT 0 E r Setting Data Setting Data C HEX DEC C HEX DEC noo g Sone Points C HEX DEC cocT f5 Cancel Item Description Set a type of a device whose value is to be changed e Enter a block number for ER e Enter a network number for LW and LSW e Enter a value of start I O number divided by 16 in decimal for SPG Set a number of a device whose value is to be changed HEX H
238. not be read because the driver automatically discards subsequent data received by the board DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY When attempting data read by executing the mdReceive mdReceiveEx function immediately after the send data completion at the sending station an error 71 0047H No reception data error occurs because the driver has not completed the RECV function and thus the receive data have not yet stored to the reception buffer of the driver Retry the operation after waiting for a while When attempting data send consecutively an error Channel busy dedicated instruction error occurs at the sending station because the channel is being used by the driver and thus the sent data cannot be received Follow the measures described below a Retry the operation after waiting for a while b Change the target station channel ye PROGRAMMING z F q0 OF ae Es are ERROR CODES TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 1 2 19 12 1 4 SEND RECV function 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 12 2 Event Setting Function 12 20 The event function monitors link devices using the CC Link IE Controller Network board and notifies events to the user program when the set conditions are met By using this function the link devices can be monitored efficiently without reading link devices regularly by the user program Personal com
239. nsmission status of each station SWOOBO to SW00B7 4 When a CC Link IE Controller Network board is reconnected disconnected to the CC Link IE Controller Network the all station error may occur for the circuit control period Normal value 50ms Worst value 100ms If the all station error occurs an error is detected in the communication status baton pass status and the data link status cyclic transmission status of all station 5 Since the board is reset during the driver operation a brief loopback occur An error is also detected in the communication status baton pass status and the data link status cyclic transmission status 6 The circuit control period is a period to reconstruct the data link when the CC Link IE Controller Network board is reconnected disconnected such as when the cable is disconnected or the power is turned from OFF to ON App 11 Appendix 2 Network Status at Power ON OFF and Board Reset During Data Linking Appendix 2 1 Network status at power ON OFF APPENDICES ag r fe 2 With the external power supply function 5 When a CC Link IE Controller Network board with the external power supply function g 5 W gt Q80BD J71GP21S SX Q81BD J71GP21S SX is used the network status varies s5 depending on the ON OFF status of the external power supply and personal computer a5 as shown below EIPOINT z The following explains the network
240. nt screen Error message Corrective action The I O master station set erase station No is not selected Please select the I O master station set erase station No Select one station number only and press the I O master station specification button MELSEC Two or more stations are selected for the I O master station set erase station No Please select 1 station for the I O master station set erase station No Select one station number only and press the I O master station specification button The reserved station set erase station No is not selected Please select the reserved station set erase station No The specified station No is set as the I O master station Please erase the I O master station and set the reserved station Select the station number and press the Reserve station specification button Erase the I O master station and set the reserved station The number of points setting value is outside the range Please input the value within the range XX YY Set the value for the points within the range of XX to YY The start device No setting value is outside the range Please input the value within the range XX YY Set the value for the start device number within the range of XX to YY The end device No setting value is outside the range Please input the number within the range XX YY Set the value for the end device number within the range of XX to YY The LB LW settings 1 are
241. nvdlians avw ava teva acWyabeierataracs iaxeliaue acsiarsvatalavsi acnssiincwia 12 20 CHAPTER 13 ERROR CODES 13 1to 13 11 13 1 List of Error Messages in CC IE Control Utility i i aha cm carta cnt nf maw wean cata a we mn cate ea ra tate at ws 13 1 13 1 1 Error messages displayed on the board information screen oeeeeceetereeereeereertreerrrteereten 13 2 13 1 2 Error messages displayed on the setting elk gt 0 oon 13 3 13 1 3 Error messages displayed on the diagnostics SCIEN corr ttt tte 13 7 13 2 List of Error Messages in Device Monitor Utility TRE ce CMe ee ee eee er ere ti 13 11 CHAPTER 14 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 1to 14 31 14 1 Cause Determination Methods for Each Trouble sai wns nasa im aac 0 foveiin te ncn Bias eas n n cna tn Gams cas ab Reo atm mee fen ncaa aver ee 14 2 14 2 Troubleshooting of Installation Uninstallation ee Cee ee Leer ee ee ee on oe ee eee ee ee 14 4 14 2 1 Installation failed Se dein yaa panda et Ste ea tain teal Wr Sr Waa pene a arpa ata a Sao 5 WW Wi WReania ata wwe iate aca teat an are were Sota jacatena 14 4 14 2 2 Uninstallation failed TTET ETETETT LEELEE asec ana aay a s Tosa ae sijeiauaPatay gaya sat oadavauayaiin auehaiie ETETETT TELETELE TETELE ETETETT 14 5 14 2 3 When the corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective at installation 14 6 14 2 4 When the driver is not installed EEEF Spat ava apacajaaeuncaiavada avasal apnca jaa cals ayerace aca amp a apaueuauesaut
242. o Monitor detail Eror alear Clear ype 1 F7 Cleat Communication Enor Counter 2 IM Clear IN side Transmission Error Counter 3 F Clear OUT side Transmission Error Counter 4 I Clear Loop Switch Counter 5 IM Clear Transient Transmission Eror Clear Enor info Station No Description Displays the information of the connected station Default Set Display Network No Group No Displays the network number displayed on the CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen Displays the group number of the connected station displayed on the CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen 1 to 239 0 to 32 Station No Displays the station number of the connected station displayed on the CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen 1 to 120 lt lt Monitor detail gt gt Displays the transmission path switch and transient transmission errors Switch transmission path Displayed when the transmission path is changed Loop Status Displays the transmission path information of the whole network Normal Loopback All station error Loopback station IN Displays the station number in which an IN side loopback occurred at loopback of the transmission path 1 to 120 Loopback station OUT Displays the station number in which an OUT side loopback occurred at loopback of the transmission path 1 to 120 Date
243. o 3 Q80BD QJ71GP21 Q80BD H J71GP21 SX QePY SX J71GP21S SX l l o External power e supply QJ71GP21 SX QCPU J71GP21S SX Normal station No 6 Normal station No 5 Normal station No 4 External power N supply Since external power is supplied to stations No 3 and No 5 networking of all stations continues normally If the boards on stations No 3 and No 5 do not have the external power supply function they are disconnected from the network When CC Link IE Controller Network boards without the external power supply function are installed to station number 3 and 5 and if personal computers of these stations are powered off station number 3 4 and 5 will be disconnected from the network Personal computer Station No 1 Station No 2 OX Station No 3 1 Station No 6 X Station No 5 Station No 4 Disconnected Personal computer 1 2 Features 1 OVERVIEW 5 Occupying one PCI bus slot Any type of CC Link IE Controller Network boards including those with external power supply occupies only one slot OVERVIEW 6 Supporting event function The event function monitors link devices using the CC Link IE Controller Network board and notifies events to the user program when the se
244. of link scan time Use of default value for normal operations is g 0 Monitoring time recommended A S Cannot link data if the link scan time exceeds the lt 2 a monitoring time 5 z Specify I O master station Set the I O master station Section 6 3 4 be T Specify reserved station Set the reserved station Section 6 3 5 p Set the send ranges for each station to which LB LW Equal assignment Section 6 4 and LX LY are equally assigned Set the constant link scan time block data assurance S g Supplementary setting per station punctuality assurance and maximum Section 6 6 number of transients in one station a QE oS 6 3 Network Range Assignment Settings 6 9 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS 6 3 1 LB LW settings Set each station s send range in LB LW to use it for the cyclic transmission 1 Setting LB LW settings 1 and LB LW settings 2 separately LB LW settings can be divided into LB LW settings 1 and LB LW settings 2 Normally setting only LB LW settings 1 is enough for LB LW communication Set LB LW settings 2 in the following cases e When extending each station s send range without changing existing assignments e When intentionally dividing each station s send range into two e g within and outside the link refresh range POINT If LB LW settings 2 is used link scan time will be longer compared to using LB LW settings 1 only e The LB LW points for
245. ol station setting of the own duplicated control number may occur 13 station error code E508H ai temporarily e Own station No duplication error error code E509H we Reset the board on which any of the errors Duplication of the own station s control station setting i described on the left is detected on the Board error code E50AH mes 3 F detail information screen Section 8 3 3 1 Check if the display settings on the Device Manager or other relevant functions are correct and install an appropriate display tA The utility screen is not displayed properly driver The operations of utility cannot be performed 14 1 Cause Determination Methods for Each Trouble Or update the Windows operating system 2 Close the other applications 3 Change the Hardware accelerator setting of the display setting 14 3 DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FUNCTIONS LGOTA ONR Y ERROR CODES APPENDICES INDEX 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC 15 The driver does not start up 1 Install the board 2 Check if the board is recognized normally on the Device Manager screen F Section 14 3 3 3 When the board is recognized normally on the Device Manager screen check if an error has been occurred on the Event Viewer screen Section 14 3 2 1 If only one user account with administrator authority is available the Us
246. oller Network interface board SW1DNC MNETG B Product name of the software package for CC Link IE Controller Network board GX Developer General product name for SW8D5C GPPW E SW8D5C GPPW EA SW8D5C GPPW EV SW8D5C GPPW EVA GX Works2 General product name for SWnDNC GXW2 E SWnDNC GXW2 EA n denotes the version number Network module Abbreviation for CC Link IE Controller Network module MELSECNET H board Generic term for Q80BD J71LP21 25 Q81BD J71LP21 25 Q80BD J71LP21S 25 Q80BDJ71LP21G Q80BD J71LP21GE Q80BD J71BR11 MELSECNET H interface board MELSECNET H module Abbreviation for Q series MELSECNET H network module MELSECNET H Abbreviation for Q series MELSECNET H network system MELSECNET 10 Abbreviation for AnU or QnA Q4AR series MELSECNET 10 network system Board WDT Abbreviation for the watchdog timer that monitors the operation of network board k Abbreviation for the watchdog timer that monitors the communication status between a network Driver WDT A 22 board and a personal computer or operating status of a personal computer ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS The following abbreviations and symbols are used in this manual 1 Abbreviations for control station and normal station and symbol format This section explains abbreviations for control station and normal station and symbol format to be used in this manual a Abbreviations Abbreviation Station status Mp Con
247. ollowing the on screen instructions select or enter the necessary E l information hi E When the corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective A Section 14 4 2 2 When installation is completed normally E When the installation is completed normally the following utilities are registered 2 O a Utility G When the installation is completed normally the utilities shown below are D registered in the Start of Windows 1 Start screen All apps or Start All Programs Folder Utility name Description 2 fe CC IE Control Utility Utility to setting board and displaying status 5 MELSEC 3 Utility to monitoring devices and changing the device 5 Device Monitor Utility value 2 CC IE Control Utility Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC NETG B S Version 1 17T or later 5 3 Device Monitor Utility Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC NETG B 5 a Version 1 17T or later ai Zz Am O W gt QW ZE ao N Yoz age See cle ToO if S W A E S 5 2 lt 2 os 23 J tn ez 55 HE CC IE Control UTILITY 7 2 Installation 7 2 T INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES MELSEG b MELSEC Data Link Library MELSEC data link library is used for the following software packages in common When the utilities are installed on the same personal computer the newer MELSEC data link library of the softw
248. ommunication error counter Checked Counter Unchecked Clear IN side Transmission Select to clear the IN side transmission error Ghecked Checked ecke Error Counter counter Unchecked Clear OUT Side Transmission Select to clear the OUT side transmission error Checked Checked ecke Error Counter counter Unchecked Checked Clear Loop Switch Counter Select to clear the loop switch counter Checked Unchecked Clear Transient Transmission a Checked Select to clear the transient transmission errors Checked Error Unchecked Clear Error info Execute to clear the selected information Close 4 Closes the Logging screen 1 The maximum number of logs displayed is 100 and older logs are deleted 2 When the communication error occurred the Start monitor button and Stop monitor button are invalidated and only the Save error log button is validated 3 When switching from the lt lt Error clear gt gt tab to the lt lt Monitor detail gt gt tab a monitoring starts automatically as in the startup of the Logging screen 4 Only 16 logs are retained and the rests are deleted when the screen is closed Execute Save error log to retain more than 16 logs 8 5 Diagnostics Screen 8 5 4 Logging screen 8 41 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE SETTINGS BEFORE PROCEDURES AND OPERATION INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES oe re
249. omputer by clicking the End button of the Parameter setting screen Section 6 1 Parameter Settings Board Information Settings gt Section 6 3 1 LB LW settings K7 Section 6 3 2 LX LY settings Section 6 3 3 Total number of link stations K Section 6 3 4 Specifying I O master station Section 6 3 5 Specifying reserved stations Section 6 7 Driver Settings Section 6 6 Supplementary Settings C Section 6 5 Routing Parameter Settings Section 6 8 Event Settings E gt Section 6 9 Target Settings gt Section 6 10 Refresh Parameter Setting SYSTEM PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS ez fr a wo 2 As awn INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING CC IE Control UTILITY SOFTWARE PACKAGES 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 6 1 Parameter Settings Board Information Settings This function is used to set a channel number network type and other settings of the CC Link IE Controller Network board to be used The parameter settings are set on the Parameter setting screen in the CC IE Control utility KCF Section 8 4 1 Parameter setting screen Parameter setting m Target board specification 17 Board2 Boad3 Board4 Routing parameter Channel No 151 v Operational setting Network type CCIE Control Control station Mode Online z Network No 1 Group No 0 a Sta
250. on is executed during data linking is shown below Data link status Data link status Communication of own station other than own Loop Time frame E status baton cyclic station cyclic Saus pass status transmission transmission status status 1 Before board reset Normal Normal Normal Normal 2 During board reset Normal Normal Normal Normal 3 After board reset Normal Normal Normal Normal 1 The status can be checked on the lt lt Monitor detail gt gt tab on the Logging screen of the CC IE Control utility on the Network diagnostics of GX Developer connected to other station s programmable controller or at special registers 2 The status can be checked on the board list Start up screen of the CC IE Control utility on the Network diagnostics of GX Developer connected to other station s programmable controller or at special registers Baton pass status of each station SWOOA0 to SWO00A7 3 The status can be checked at the Select station network device status display on the CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result of the CC IE Control utility on the Network diagnostics of GX Developer connected to other station s programmable controller or at special registers Cyclic transmission status of each station SWOOBO to SW00B7 4 When a CC Link IE Controller Network board is reconnected disconnected to the CC Link IE Controller Network the all station error m
251. on Default Setting range Maintains constant link scan time Constant scan Set when a user does not wish a variation in link scan No setting 1 to 500 time Block data assurance Select to prevent separation of link data by each Checked per station is available station at cyclic transmission 2 racers Unchecked Transient setting Set the executing condition of transient transmission Punctuality is Checked 3 Set whether punctuality is assured or not Unchecked guaranteed 3 Unchecked Maximum No of Set the number of transients that can be executed transients in one 2 1to 10 i during one scan for a single station station Reflects the settings and closes the Supplementary End KONE setting screen Without reflecting the settings closes the Cancel n ai m Supplementary setting screen 4 Ifa longer constant link scan time is set an error may be detected on baton pass status of each station SW00A0 to SWO0A7 and cyclic transmission status of each station SWOOBO to SW00B7 of all stations for approximately 300ms 1 link scan time when the personal computer or board is reset 2 The separation prevention refers to a prevention of link data with double words 32 bits such as the current value of the positioning module from being separated to new data and old data in units of one word 16 bits due to the refresh timing of cyclic transmission 3 The following table indicates the link
252. onal computer for the numeric order of PCI slot number When the operation settings of two or more boards are changed at the same time an error of duplicated station number or duplicated control number may occur temporarily Reset the board on which any of the following errors is detected on the Board detail information screen Section 8 3 3 e Duplication of station No and control station setting of the own station error code E5081 e Own station No duplication error error code E509n e Duplication of the own station s control station setting error code E50An For details of errors refer to the following manual K5 CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual 8 4 Setting Screen 8 4 1 Parameter setting screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 4 2 Network range assignment screen This screen is displayed by clicking the Network range assignment button on the gt Parameter setting screen m CF Section 8 4 1 Parameter setting screen It is used to set the cyclic transmission ranges of LB LW LX and LY that can be sent by each station m O Ke 2 Network range assignment a Network range assignment L 5 Assignment method Montong time 2000 ms nO Total stations 2 vf Points Start Start End Sua ices LB LW setinostt LB LW setting Station No LB LW Points Start End Points
253. ons App 52 Appendix 13 4 Q81BD J71GP21S SX APPENDICES Memo App 53 Appendix 13 External Dimensions Appendix 13 4 Q81BD J71GP21S SX INDEX Numerics 16 point Register Monitor scccccctctttteeteet eee 9 4 A APPLICATION FUNCTIONS wee 12 1 B Batch Monitor ccccccetc teeter teen ees 9 3 Bit device resetting wee 9 9 Bit device setting eee ee eee eee eee 9 9 Block data assurance per statione ee 12 3 Board detail information wee eee 8 10 Board Information Screens wee 8 7 Board list sereen st cit ct etter nena 8 7 Bus IVF teSt ctccct ccc ctc et te tee ee eeee ieee 5 18 C Cable Connection wees 5 1 4 CC IE Control UTILITY eee eee eee 8 1 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result SCreeEN tierce eens 8 29 Changing Word Device Values wee 9 7 Channel number confirmation screen 07e ee 8 9 Checking the version information 577e ees 8 6 Circuit test ccccceccctcc cette eens 5 22 Combinations with Existing Software App 26 Communication test Screen stcccccettcteente 8 36 Constant scan crt ctttt tt eter ete eee 12 3 Cyclic Transmission weenie a 1 3 D DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY wee 9 1 Diagnostics Screen eee eee eee 8 29 Displaying the Help SCreenN Mee 9 2 Driver setting SCrEEN ttt teens 8 21 Driver Settings ee ee eee eee eee eee eee 6 22 Driver WDT function ee ee eee eee eee 4 7 E Ending the utility E e A aden esac Rare alae erage acesate 8 5 9 2 Equal assignment SCreenN Bee 8 17 Equal Assignment Settings we
254. ontroller Network board when starting the CC IE Control utility o The Parameter setting and CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screens D2 are also started BS sia CC JE Control utility oO Zz r Board 1 Q Channel No 151 Network No fot Group No Jo Station No Em z Type Normal station Status fie I i Channel No Network Nof GroupNo Statinno E Status J Board detail information pem J NetwokNo Gouno f StationNo T E Status aa Board detail information 5 5 5 ChannelNo Network penta GroupNo Statina me E j ard detail information W gt Diagnostics Setting ee O Stop monitor Channel No confirm Cos 5 K ao ow 2E ae wy Ww cae oe ano s X 298 S a rd Jaag 26 oe c o S o 8 8 3 Board Information Screens 8 7 8 3 1 Board list screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY Item ah System menu Description Displays the system menu 4 MELSEC Display content Displays channel numbers of the CC Link IE Controller Channel No 3 Network board ees Displays network numbers of the CC Link IE Controller Network No 1 to 239 Network board Displays group numbers of the CC Link IE Controller F Group No 0 to 328 F Network board Onm Siion Displays station numbers of the CC Link IE Controller 3 information of the Station No 1 to 120 Network board CC Link IE Controller Type Displays station type of the CC Link IE Controller
255. ose received data at the time of storage to the reception buffer of the driver When the sending side sent data with arrival acknowledgment execution type the process of send data is completed normally at the sending side but data are discarded Driver Reception buffer of driver Received data of Channel 3 Received data of Channel 7 Board Received data of Channel 1 Sending station Crentela Received data of Channel 5 Channel 2 Data sent from Channel 3 Received data of Channel 4 other station by Channel 4 the SEND Channel 5 instruction Channel 6 Channel 7 Received data of Channel 2 Channel 8 gt X Received data of Channel 6 Received data can be stored up to 128 disregarding the channel numbers Discards received data 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 12 1 4 SEND RECV function 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS lt Precautions for using RECV function gt When receiving data to the multiple channels of the board create a user program to read data from all channels that receive data If a channel from which data are not read exists in the channel from which data are received the received data of the channel from which data are not read are accumulated in the reception buffer of the driver and all area of 128 data are occupied In this case the received data of other channels can
256. ot be executed After setting project path execute it again Set the path for the project Drive Path File name has not been set Please set the Drive Path File name Set the Drive Path File name has been specified in succession in the directory specification Do not specify in succession Do not specify in succession Disk full while accessing XX Note XX indicates a file name 13 1 List of Error Messages in CC IE Control Utility Reserve the disc space of the write destination 13 10 13 1 3 Error messages displayed on the diagnostics screen DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY PROGRAMMING Sm APPLICATION FUNCTIONS ERROR CODES TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX 1 3 ERROR CODES 13 2 List of Error Messages in Device Monitor Utility The following explains the corrective actions to error messages in the Device monitor utility Error message Corrective action DEC input range error Input a decimal number in the range of 0 to 9 Input 0 9 HEX input range error Input a hexadecimal number in the range of 0 to 9 A to F Input 0 9 A F Input Error Input a octal number in the range of 0 to 7 Input 0 7 Station No is not input Input a station number Station No is out of the range Check the range of the station number and Input The device that can use in this function dose not exist Selec
257. out changes to your computer rol helps prevent potentially harmful programs from making changes to your computer Jser Account Control settings Programs ty to install software or make changes to my computer Imake changesto Windows settings APPENDICES Not recommer nded Choose this only if you needto use programs that are not certified for Windows 7 because they do not support User Account Control 4 Setting completion INDEX Appendix 9 Warning Message Appears on Windows App 34 Appendix 9 2 Methods for preventing the warning message APPENDICES mms CELSE 2 Allowing the warning message without showing it The following shows a procedure for allowing a warning message without showing it 1 Open Control Panel Getting Started Connect to a Projector Cal fest Calculator w Sticky Notes gF Paint Q Snipping Tool a XPS Viewer sg Windows Fax and Scan Remote Desktop Connection Search programs and files 2 2 Select System and Security E gt Control Panel v 44 Search Contrai Pane P Adjust your computer s settings View by Category User Accounts and Family Safety Qaia REMARKS When using Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 select Classic View Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display Conn r Programs Uin
258. parts lt K2 2 Parts and tools required for external i power supply cable in this section Yn Wire external power supply cable lt K2 3 Making external power supply cable E in this section 5 o Connect the external power supply cable K 4 Connecting external power supply 5 cable to the board in this section a y End 2 2 Parts and tools required for external power supply cable g The following parts and tools are required for making external power supply cable Z ma a Connector set accessories Check that the following parts are included with the attached connector set 5 AW z lt O Oui Type Model name Applicable wire size Quantity a Connector 1 178288 3 1 Woe uz Contact 175218 2 AWG 20 16 3 Spare 1 Eui LNO b Cable Use an external power supply cable with heat resistant vinyl sheath of 0 5 to 1 25 mm AWG 20 16 c Tool Use the following specified crimp tools PARAMETER SETTINGS Model Applicable wire size Inquiry 91558 1 AWG 20 16 Tyco Electronics 1762956 1 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 5 4 Wiring 5 415 5 4 2 Wiring external power supply cable 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 3 Making external power supply cable The following explains the method for making external power supply cable a Crimping a contacting pin Using a crimp tool crimp the cable and contacting pin Set the cont
259. ply Time frame 13 Personal computer power OFF Before personal computer power ON ON OFF 14 Personal computer power ON Before CC Link IE Controller Network board driver start up ON ON Normal Normal status Error status Normal 15 CC Link IE Controller Network board driver in operation ON ON Normal Normal Error Normal 4 16 App 13 After CC Link IE Controller Network board driver start up ON ON Normal Normal Normal Appendix 2 Network Status at Power ON OFF and Board Reset During Data Linking Appendix 2 1 Network status at power ON OFF Normal APPENDICES MELSEC 1 The status can be checked on the lt lt Monitor detail gt gt tab on the Logging screen of the CC IE Control utility on the Network diagnostics of GX Developer connected to other station s programmable controller or at special registers 2 The status can be checked on the board list Start up screen of the CC IE Control utility on the Network diagnostics of GX Developer connected to other station s programmable controller or at special registers Baton pass status of each station SWOOA0 to SW00A7 3 The status can be checked at the Select station network device status display on the CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result of the CC IE Control utility on the Network diagnostics of GX Developer connected to o
260. ption not to enter the sleep mode hiber nation mode or enabling fast startup and restart the personal computer 307 0133n Link refresh error had occurred e Reset the board e The memory may be insufficient Please close other applications running e Terminate the program and restart the personal computer e Check the free space of the memory e Check the board installation status e The personal computer is faulty when other personal computers normally operate Repair or replace the faulty personal computer e When the same error occurs in another personal computer replace the CC Link IE Controller Network board e Consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative 512 0200H PCI bus error occurred When the same error occurs in another personal computer replace the CC Link IE Controller Network board e The personal computer is faulty when other personal computers normally operate Repair or replace the faulty personal computer 539 021Bu The breakdown of hardware was detected e Change the power option not to enter the sleep mode hibernation mode or enabling fast startup and restart the personal computer e Restart the personal computer If any of the above actions do not solve the error the board may be a failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 1 The event 256 0100H may be registered to the log as an error when the versions of the driver a
261. puter User program qt Receives the event notification using the mdWaitBdEvent function CC Link IE Controller Network board Monitors link device data 1 ei QCPU Q mode CC Link IE Controller Network module Link device data change CC Link IE Controller Network The following shows the features of the event function 1 2 3 The user program to read and check link devices regularly does not need to be created since the event function monitors link devices using the CC Link IE Controller Network board according to the specified event settings The satisfaction of the event conditions is notified in the user program by performing the process that waits for the events issued from the CC Link IE Controller Network board when the conditions are met using the mdWaitBdEvent function of the MELSEC data link library Therefore the link devices can be monitored efficiently In the parameter for the detection condition of link devices the maximum total of 4086 64 x 64 points of bit devices can be monitored since the maximum of 64 events can be set and the maximum of 64 points can be registered per event when specifying bit devices The changes of word device values can be monitored 12 2 Event Setting Function 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 4 POINT 1 Events are notified every link refresh cycle Section 8 3 3 Board detail
262. puter 2 gt gt CC Link IE a re rs a Controller 2 2 Network g g board IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT b Connecting the optical fiber cable The following shows the method for connecting the optical fiber cable CC Link IE Controller Network board Power OFF the personal computer Board side connector Cable side Connect the cable side connector to the connector board side one paying attention to the orientation Push it until a click can be Connector heard Hook Lightly pull it to check that it is securely connected c Disconnecting the optical fiber cable The following shows the method for disconnecting the optical fiber cable 1 ITX CC Link IE Controller Network board ine Board side cable L Connector LL A connector Power OFF the personal computer Ke Ka a E Press the connector hook to disconnect the e Cable side connector f 5 14 5 4 Wiring 5 4 1 Controller network system PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 5 4 2 Wiring external power supply cable This section explains the method for connecting external power supply cable to the CC u Link IE Controller Network board with external power supply function i O 1 Connection procedure The following flowchart shows a procedure for connecting external power supply gt O cable St pg art 5 z Do y Check the required
263. qual assignment lt O e Equal assignment of LX LY ape Zz The specified link device range can be equally assigned to the I O ranges between 308 3 mA the I O master station and relevant stations Fe e Identical point assignment of LB LW peal Identical points are assigned to the LB LW send ranges of each station ez Identical point f e Identical point assignment of LX LY assignment f Identical points are assigned to the I O ranges between the I O master station and other stations fr HO MEO 2 par awn INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 6 4 Equal Assignment Settings 6 17 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC lt Setting example gt 1 Equally assigning LBO to 1FF 512 points to the send ranges of station number 1 to 4 Equal asslenment ES Select Equal assignment Identical point assignment Points aA and enter following values G Start station 1 Equal assignment m LB LW settings 1 End station 4 LB equal assignment LW equal assignment Start No 0000 Start station 1 Station Start station Station End station 4 Station End station Station Start No 0000 Start No Total points assigned 512 Total points assigned Total points assigned 512 Devices are equally assigned in the LB LW setting 1 field of the Network range assignment screen Network range assignment Network range assignment f Assi
264. quest target to the request source Avoid path C when setting the return path ye PROGRAMMING Request target z F q0 OF ae zs lt L 2 When transient transmission is performed to a remote network using the 2 routing parameters the amount of transmission data and the number of R transmissions may affect the entire system since data is transferred through a many networks For example in networks No 2 to 5 in the figure above the a link scan time may become temporarily longer and the transient transmission within the own station may be delayed because of the transient transmissions o from other networks When using the routing parameters design the route 5 considering the entire system z W a O x ke i Q Q A amp lt x A Q zZ 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 1 2 11 12 1 2 Routing function 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 6 Setting example The routing parameter setting examples A and B are explained using the system configuration described in Section 12 1 1 2 2 Relay station 3 Relay station 4 Relay station QCPU 1Mp1 QCPU 1Ns2 2Mp1 QCPU 2Ns2 3Ns3 QCPU 3Ns2 4Mp1 Network No 1 4 Network No 2 YC Network No 3 X C Network No 4 5 Relay station QCPU 1Ns4 QCPU 2Ns3 QCPU 3MP1
265. r Memory size Operating Example Windows XP Professional system If exist type the number of boards and so on Other Existence aa option Situation checked with disconnecting other option boards boards Item Condition Situation Example The LINK LED does not turn on even though the computer is turned on Failure description 2 Failure content Occurrence frequency Occurrence condition If the failure occurs only in the specific case inform the occurrence condition noticed Troubleshooting result Inform the following descriptions e The result of troubleshooting performed e The situation when checking with other boards or computers Example Event ID 295 The Board WDT error had occurred error is displayed on the event viewer when the personal computer is started It also occurs when mounting the problem board with another computer Other boards mounted with the computer works properly 14 9 Information Required for Inquiries 14 31 DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FUNCTIONS LGOTA ONE ERROR CODES APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES i isl Se APPENDICES Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System This section explains precautions for accessing a redundant CPU system using the CC Link IE Controller Network board Access to redundant CPU system 1 Redundant C
266. r LW A EIE EIEE DE EEE H Station Station L Data S number 1 number 1 assurance S 3 Station Station Data m number 2 number 2 assurance w Link refresh 3 Station Station Data number 3 number3 f assurance 2 J Data S f assurance 5 j j K K ooo o oono oaanaad W DO a L T 2 fr ke 1 The separation prevention refers to a prevention of link data with double words 32 bits such as the current value of the positioning module from being separated to new data and old data in units of one word 16 bits due to the refresh timing of cyclic transmission n W Q 2 EJPOINT 3 fo Station based block data assurance is applied only to the link refresh process a Set an interlock when using a direct access of link devices x lt W Q zZ 11 2 Cyclic Transmission 11 4 11 2 1 Station based block data assurance 1 1 PROGRAMMING MELSEC 11 3 Link Special Relays SB and Link Special Registers SW The information when linking data is stored in link special relays SB and link special registers SW Faulty areas and causes of errors can be investigated by using and monitoring the information in a user program The following table shows the specific use for these devices For more details refer to the following manual lt CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual 1 Information on the own station Personal computer status of the own station SB004An SBO04BH SW004BuH normal abnorma
267. r the function version and ROM version of the CC Link IE Controller Network board and the SW1DNC MNETG B version 1 Checking serial number function version and ROM version of CC Link IE Controller Network board a Checking serial number and function version The function version of the CC Link IE Controller Network board can be checked at Serial section as shown below KKK KR kkk kk kkk KK B t Serial No Function version Xv J ba App 27 Appendix 6 Checking Serial Number and Function Version APPENDICES iis isl Se b Checking ROM version The ROM version of the CC Link IE Controller Network board can be viewed on the Board detail information screen in the CC IE Control utility Board detail information Board type Q80BDJ71GP21 SX Product information 0912200000000005 Present Error Noer st CS S ROM version i r Link refresh Maximum Minimum Current timefms J 15 J 15 15 Save SB SW Reset Memory Test Close 2 Checking SW1DNC MNETG B version To check the SW1DNC MNETG B version select Version information from the system menu on the board list screen start screen of the CC IE Control utility Version information SW1DNC MNETG B 1 03D CCIE Control utility 2007 12 12 Copyright C 2007 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved Appendix 6 Checking Serial Number and Function Version App 28 DEVIC
268. r as shown below a When the system is started Data link status Data link status Personal poop Communication of own station other than own Time frame computer status baton cyclic station cyclic status fay ae power pass status transmission transmission status status Personal computer power OFF Loopback 1 Before CC Link IE Controller Network ON Error Error Normal f occurred board driver start up CC Link IE Controller Network board Loopback 2 a ON Error Error Normal 4 driver in operation occurred After CC Link IE Controller Network 3 ON Normal Normal Normal Normal board driver start up b When the system is shut down Data link status Data link status Personal con Communication of own station other than own Time frame computer co status baton cyclic station cyclic power status pass status transmission transmission status status Loopback x 4 Personal computer power OFF OFF Error Error Normal 4 occurred Appendix 2 Network Status at Power ON OFF and Board Reset During Data Linking App 10 Appendix 2 1 Network status at power ON OFF DEVICE MONITOR MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY UTILITY PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FUNCTIONS ERROR CODES gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES c When the personal computer is restarted Restarting Windows Data link status Data link status Personal Communicatio
269. rd Information Settings lt Assigning channel numbers to the CC Link IE Controller Network boards gt lt Assigning board numbers in the CC IE Control utility gt APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 3 File Output App 16 Appendix 3 1 Parameter file APPENDICES Appendix 3 2 SB SW file All SB SW information is saved in the CSV file format when the Save SB SW button on the Board detail information screen Board detail information face 7iGr21sx 912200000000006 s Board type Product information Present Error ROM version m Link refresh Maximum Minimum Current re Poe Pe time ms Save SB S W Reset Memory Test Close The following shows the SB SW file format SB SW Board type Product information Channel No Network No Group No Station No Network Type CC Link IE Controller Normal station or 151 to 154 1 to 239 0 to 32 1 to 120 Network control station SB SW information Device Value Device Value SB0000 0 1 SW0000 0000 to FFFF SB0001 omi SWw0001 0000 to FFFF SB0002 0 1 SW0002 0000 to FFFF SBO1FF 0 1 SW01FF 0000 to FFFF Actual values are displayed in the shaded area App 17 Appendix 3 File Output Appendix 3 2 SB SW file APPENDICES iii isl Se An example of the file saved with the Save SB SW button is shown below S SB SW OF Q80BD J71GP21 081220000000
270. re packages and icons to be registered Installation and Uninstallation Precautions The following are the precautions when installing and uninstalling the software package e Log on as a user having administrator authority Make sure to close other applications running on Windows including resident software such as antivirus software before installation and uninstallation e The installer may not work normally because the update program of operating system or other companies software such as Windows Update and Java update may start automatically Please install the driver after changing the setting of the update program not to start automatically Check if the display settings on the Device Manager or other relevant functions are correct and install an appropriate display driver e Or update the Windows operating system The language switching function of the operation system set by Regional and Language Options on the Control Panel screen is not supported The installation or uninstallation may not work normally if the language setting is changed When using Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 or Windows 8 1 NET Framework 3 5 is required Enable the NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 or 3 0 in Turn Windows features on or off on the control panel A network drive cannot be specified as the installation destination When the parameters have been set with the utility installed
271. result refer to the following manual lt CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual 14 4 Flowchart when Data Link Failed 14 4 3 Flowchart when ERR LED turned ON 14 19 DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FUNCTIONS LGOTA lene cee Y ERROR CODES APPENDICES INDEX 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 4 4 Flowchart when data link among whole system is disabled An error occurred Is parameter set to the NO control station Set a parameter NO YES Did data link start Is the control station mode NO set to ONLINE When the control station is a programmable controller correct the setting number and reset the controller Ne Did data link start YES gt End Is the monitoring time set for the NO link parameter greater than the link scan time Correct the setting value for the monitoring time NO YES Did data link start Is the RUN LED of the NO control station ON Are the RUN LEDs NO from the start to the end gt stations ON Y v 1 2 3 To the next page To the next page To the next page 14 20 14 4 Flowchart when Data Link Failed 14 4 4 Flowchart when data link among whole system is disabled 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Replace the CC Link IE Controller Network board or network module installed mounted to the faulty
272. rlapped e Cable disconnection incorrect cable connection between IN ON red Error occurred ERR and OUT Network parameters are corrupted or some settings are inconsistent between the control and normal stations Such as reserved station specification total station numbers and network numbers OFF Normal status Normal status PRM ON green Operating as a control station OFF Operating as a normal station ON green Operating data link cyclic transmission operated Flashing i i a D LINK gresi Operating data link cyclic transmission stopped OFF Not operating data link Disconnected from network RD ON green Receiving data Receiving data OFF Not receiving data Not receiving data STR ON green External power supplied External power supplied j OFF External power not supplied External power not supplied 1 Displayed only when the target module or board is equipped with a external power supply 8 5 Diagnostics Screen 8 5 1 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 6 Error details buttons Displays the Error details screen by clicking the button Displays detail information error factor and troubleshooting Error details Select station No 1 Detail information Total number of received data on IN side 0 Total number of received data on OUT side 0 Own station connection status Disconnecting Cable disconnected on IN side Cable disconnected o
273. ror No error z ROM version 2c ROM version 2c 3 T Link refresh Link refresh 5 a Maximum Minimum Current Maximum Minimum Current A i time ms 0 0 0 time ms 0 0 0 Test result Test result The Self loopback test was normally completed The Self loopback test was abnormally N completed E z O Memory Test Memory Test m n If the test completes abnormally replace the optical fiber cable and execute the test again If it fails again the CC Link IE Controller Network board hardware may be faulty m Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description 5 He of the problem 2 m ol WW a O re Ww a 12 2 z H W N a z lt iy waz 200 OOF wZzd ofa eee ano PARAMETER SETTINGS INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 5 5 Test 5 21 5 5 3 Self loopback test 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 5 5 4 Circuit test This test checks the cable connection status and line status in the network system and parameter setting status of each station from the control station The following explains a procedure for circuit test assuming the executing station is the CC Link IE Controller Network board and the target station as the CC Link IE Controller Network module Es POINT The circuit test can be executed only when the CC Link IE Controller Network board is the control station When it is the normal sta
274. rosoft Windows 7 Professional 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Standard Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 Pro 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 1 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 1 Pro 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Microsoft Windows 8 1 Enterprise 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Monitor Resolution 1024 x 768 dots or higher Hard disk space 1GB or more 2 7 2 5 Operating Environment 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Item Description Microsoft Visual Basic 6 0 Microsoft Visual Basic NET 2003 Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Visual Basic Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Visual Basic Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Visual Basic OVERVIEW N Microsoft Visual Studio 2012 Visual Basic Programming language Microsoft Visual Studio 2013 Visual Basic English version 4 Microsoft Visual C 6 0 Microsof
275. s gt Select a test item using the mode setting on the Parameter setting screen in the CC IE S Control utility o The CC Link IE Controller Network board test has the following six types Item Test type Description Reference 6 Bus I F test Tests the hardware of the bus I F function of the CC Link IE Section 5 5 1 lt 5 E Controller Network board z0 Tests the hardware in the CC Link IE Controller Network Be f H W test Section 5 5 2 ae Board confirmation board Tests the hardware of the CC Link IE Controller Network Self loopback test board alone including the send receive circuit of the Section 5 5 3 transmission system and cables 2 Checks the cable connection status line status and z Circuit test parameter setting status of each station from the control Section 5 5 4 5 station a Checks the cable status connected between two stations Network confirmation Station to station test from OUT at the executing station to IN at the target Section 5 5 5 station Checks whether the transient transmission can be routed T Communication test correctly between the own station and specified Section 5 5 6 communication target 5 m ol IPOINT The test modes are equivalent to offline The data link cannot be executed if one station is set to the test mode during data link Set the mode to Online when performing data link W a O re Ww a 12 2 z H W N a z lt iy gaz 300 OOF Wu BER Spi ano PA
276. s Compliant with each in X Y Z 2 Z i Vibration resistance JISB3502and 84 to 150 Hz 9 8 m s directions 2 IEC 61131 2 Under continuous vibration 5 Constant 5 Frequency Half amplitude Sweep count acceleration 5 to 8 4 Hz 1 75 mm E QW 8 4 to 150 Hz 4 9 m s 26 4 mw Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131 2 147 m s2 3 times each in X Y Z directions Waz F r 500 Operating atmosphere No corrosive gases iz amp s Be Operating altitude 0 to 2000 m oF in a z P ano Installation location Inside a control panel Overvoltage category ll or less Pollution degree 2 or less 1 Do not use or store the board under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude Om Re Doing so may cause malfunction tu 2 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected z E between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises Eo Category Il applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300V is 2500V 3 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the ih environment in which the equipment is used a g Pollution degree 2 is when only non conductive pollution occurs A temporary conductivity caused k g lt by condensing must be expected occasionally 2a g Remarks ooo occ 258 The general spe
277. s transmission when relaying 480 words 4 executing the transient transmission from the 480 words i other networks ii user program by relaying other networks g Q Clear Clears the routing parameter settings Z9 2 O X Check Checks the routing parameter settings z S Zim Reflects the settings and closes the Routing Oz 9 End a ca parameter setting screen ee Without reflecting the settings closes the Cancel 0 i inan E Routing parameter setting screen 1 The setting of 960 words is applicable only when the relay station and target station for the transient transmission that relays other networks are the network modules compatible with the MELSEC Q series re 5 c e Ss o 8 8 4 Setting Screen 8 19 8 4 4 Routing parameter setting screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 4 5 Supplementary setting screen This screen is displayed by clicking the Supplementary setting button on the Network range assignment screen Section 8 4 2 Network range assignment screen It is used to set the constant link scan time block data assurance per station punctuality assurance and maximum number of transients in one station Supplementary setting Constant scan 500 ms Block data assurance per station Transient setting IV Punctuality is guaranteed Maximum No of transients in one station 2 Times Item Descripti
278. safely even when a fault occurs in a personal computer Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction 1 Emergency stop circuits protection circuits and protective interlock circuits for conflicting operations such as forward reverse rotations or upper lower limit positioning must be configured external to the programmable controller 2 The station to which the board is installed may be disconnected from the data link due to a data link error If this occurs the data output from the station and written to other stations before the error will be held until the station is reconnected to the network until its data link is restarted Provide a mechanism for data link status monitoring and error handling for each station that is connected to the data link system For the operating status of each station after a communication failure refer to CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual for each network Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident When changing data during operation configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely Configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure Laser diodes are used in the optical transceivers of the CC Link IE Controller Network The laser
279. scan operation with or without punctuality assurance Punctuality assurance Link scan operation e Constant link scan time is maintained With assurance e Link scan time is longer than the setting without assurance e Link scan time becomes longer as the larger number is set for Maximum No of transients in one station e A variation in link scan time occurs when a transient transmission is requested Without assurance e A variation in link scan time becomes larger as the larger number is set for Maximum No of transients in one station 8 20 8 4 Setting Screen 8 4 5 Supplementary setting screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 4 6 Driver setting screen This screen is displayed by clicking the Driver setting button on the Parameter setting screen 5 CF Section 8 4 1 Parameter setting screen It is used to set the driver WDT monitoring time time out time and link refresh cycle Driver setting Driver WDT monitoring time lt I Use driver WDT function 3 o 10r r Transient timeout monitoring time Current value 15 j Ee Setting value 15 2 5 Link refresh cycle l O Current value 0 ind m n Setting value 15 an n 6 Item Description Default Setting range 5 Displays the current value of the driver WDT 5 Driver WDT Monitoring Time monitoring time and the setting value to be entered w Use driver WDT i
280. sed on the requirements of the EMC Directive and the harmonized standards However they do not guarantee that the entire machinery constructed according to the descriptions complies with the EMC Directive The manufacture of the machinery must determine the testing method for compliance and declare conformity to the EMC Directive App 45 Appendix 12 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE Appendix 12 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive APPENDICES 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive The standards applicable to the EMC Directive are listed below All test items were tested by installing each device on a personal computer bearing a CE certification logo a Emission requirements Standard Test item Test description Value specified in standard e 30M to 230MHz QP 40dBuV m The electromagnetic wave which 9 CISPR16 2 3 the product emits to the external measured at 10m distance e 230M to 1000MHz QP 47dBuV m Radiated emission space is measured EN61131 2 measured at 10m distance 2007 e 0 15M to 0 5MHz QP 79dB CISPR16 2 1 The noise level which the 9 CISPR16 1 2 product emits to the power line is mean eee oy e 0 5M to 30MHz QP 73dB Conducted emission measured Mean 60dB 1 The tests were conducted installed in a control panel 2 QP Quasi peak value Mean Average value b Immunity requirements Standard Test item Test description
281. setting Event setting Input format Ce g ee a 3 P Clear Check Cancel Item Description Default Setting range Select the method for entering word device DEC Input format DEC setting values HEX Device code Set the device name LB LX SB LW SW LB 0000 to 7FFF LW 00000 to 1FFFF Device No Set a device number LX 0000 to 1FFF SB 0000 to 01FF SW 0000 to 01FF Set points from the device number Device size Can be set only when a device code is a bit 1 to 64 device D gt Edge detect Detection method 2 3 Set the detection method Level detect Bit device B ON OFF Event condition Set the event condition Word device Equal Unequal Change Word device setting Set a word device setting value 9 Can be set only when a device code is a 0 to 65535 value word device Event No Set an event number 1 to 64 Batch deletes the event settings 8 4 Setting Screen 8 4 7 Event setting screen 8 23 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES ee re 5 c e Ss o 8 8 CC IE Control UTILITY MELSE GD Item Description Default Setting range Check Checks the e
282. setting screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 22 4 POINT The link refresh method is a method to access the CC Link IE Controller Network driver buffer The data in the link refresh storage area of the CC Link IE Controller Network driver buffer and the CC Link IE Controller Network board are updated by the link refresh function When the block data assurance per station is specified in the parameter of the control station separation of link device data is prevented Personal computer CC Link IE Controller Network board Reading l CC Link IE Refresh data User program i Controller Network storage area c drive buffer Link refresh Writing 1 Separation is a condition that link data with double words 32 bits such as the current value of the positioning module are separated to new data and old data in units of one word 16 bits due to the refresh timing of cyclic transmission 8 4 Setting Screen 8 4 6 Driver setting screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 4 7 Event setting screen This screen is displayed by clicking the Event setting button on the Parameter setting screen CF Section 8 4 1 Parameter setting screen This function is used to set the conditions for monitoring link device changes using the CC Link IE Controller Network board to notify events to the user program Event
283. shi representative E S Siea u5 85 5 5 Test 5 19 5 5 2 H W test 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION MELSEC 5 5 3 Self loopback test This tests the hardware of the CC Link IE Controller Network board alone including the send receive circuit of the transmission system and cables 1 Connect optical fiber cables to the IN and OUT of the CC Link IE Controller Network board Q80BD J71GP21 SX AM 2 In the Parameter setting screen of the CC IE Control utility set Mode to Self loopback test and click the button Operational setting Network type CCIE Control Control station Mode Self loopback test v4 Setting Network No ji Group No Station No 1 3 The following confirmation dialog box appears CC IE Control utility Writing parameter and reset Board2 Is that OK Clicking the Yes button executes the self loopback test 5 20 5 5 Test 5 5 3 Self loopback test 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 4 The result is displayed on Test result field of the Board detail information screen ff r r oO lt Normal completion gt lt Abnormal completion gt g O Board detail information k Board detail information Board type Q80BD J71GP21 Sx Board type Q80BD J71GP21 5x Product information 031 220000000000 B Product information 091220000000000 8 zm Present Error No error Present Er
284. shment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Revision Print Date Manual Number APR 2007 SH NA 080691ENG A First edition Oct 2007 SH NA 080691ENG B Jan 2008 SH NA 080691ENG C Addition Section 8 1 2 Appendix 3 Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Section 1 2 Section 1 3 Section 2 5 Chapter 5 Section 8 1 1 Section 8 1 3 Section 8 2 Section 8 3 Section 9 2 1 Section 9 2
285. side Input side power supply side power supply side Induction Filter Filter Output side device side Output side device side Noise will be induced when the input Separately install the input and and output cables are bundled output cables e Ground the ground terminal of the noise filter to the ground point of the control panel using as short wiring as possible approximately 10cm Appendix 12 2 Requirements for Conformance to Low Voltage Directive The CC Link IE Controller Network board is out of the requirement for conformance to the Low Voltage Directive since it does not use the power supply in the range of 50 to 1000V AC and 75 to 1500V DC Appendix 12 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE App 48 Appendix 12 2 Requirements for Conformance to Low Voltage Directive DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK APPLICATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING LIBRARY ERROR CODES gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC Appendix 13 External Dimensions Appendix 13 1 Q80BD J71GP21 SX 174 5 6 87 181 7 13 168 6 61 p RUNERR 98 5 3 88 107 4 21 SD RD TINS A o o 5 A BD808C 318651 121 4 76 18 5 0 73 a E i unit mm inch App 49 Appendix 13 External Dimensions Appendix 13 1 Q80BD J71GP21 SX APPENDICES
286. so that the number of LB points per station does not exceed 16384 points Set the value for the LB points not to exceed 16384 points The number of LW points per station exceeds 16384 points Please set the settings so that the number of LW points per station does not exceed 16384 points Set the value for the LW points not to exceed 16384 points The monitoring time setting value is outside the range Please input the value within the range 5 2000 13 1 List of Error Messages in CC IE Control Utility Set the value for the monitoring time within the range of 5 to 2000 13 1 2 Error messages displayed on the setting screen 13 4 DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY PROGRAMMING Sm APPLICATION FUNCTIONS ERROR CODES TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX 1 3 ERROR CODES 3 Equal assignment screen GD Corrective action Error message The equally assigned end station setting value is outside the range Please input a value within the range XX YY Set the value for the equally assigned end station within the range of XX to YY The equally assigned start station setting value is outside the range Please input a value within the range XX YY Set the value for the equally assigned start station within the range of XX to YY The equally assigned start device No setting value is outside the range Please input a value in the range XX YY Set th
287. sold separately for single purchase Order a manual by quoting the manual number model code listed in the table above A 20 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Relevant sections are listed below for each purpose for using the CC Link IE Controller Network board Refer to each section when you want to know the following 1 Overview and features of CC Link IE Controller Network board Chapter 1 Chapter 1 gives an overview of the CC Link IE Controller Network board and its features 2 System configuration Chapter 2 Chapter 2 explains the system configuration 3 Specifications of CC Link IE Controller Network board Chapter 3 Chapter 3 gives the specifications of the CC Link IE Controller Network board 4 Functions of CC Link IE Controller Network board Chapter 4 Chapter 4 gives the functions of the CC Link IE Controller Network board 5 Preparatory procedures and setting of CC Link IE Controller Network board Chapter 5 Chapter 5 gives the procedures and setting to be done before starting the operation 6 Parameter setting for CC Link IE Controller Network board Chapter 6 Chapter 6 describes the parameter setting 7 Installing and uninstalling procedures of software package Chapter 7 Chapter 7 gives the procedure for installing and uninstalling the software package 8 Detailed operation method of each utility Chapter 8 and Chapter 9 Chapter 8 and Chapter 9 explain the detailed operation methods for each utility
288. t Visual C NET 2003 Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Visual C z q ao gt L z e 2 SYSTEM Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Visual C g Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Visual C E o Microsoft Visual Studio 2012 Visual C z W Microsoft Visual Studio 2013 Visual C T 1 Windows XP 64 bit version and Windows Vista 64 bit version are not supported 2 For a combination of the operation system and the programming language refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base 3 Applicable to Q80BD J71GP21 SX Q80BD J71GP21S SX only T Not supported by SW1DNC MNETG B Version 1 16S or later When using one of these operating 5 system use SW1DNC MNETG B Version 1 15R or earlier SW1DNC MNETG B Version 1 15R 5 and its supported manual are stored on the CD ROM of this product 5 m lt Appendix 8 4 When creating 64 bit version Visual Basic application to be used for the MELSEC data link library use Visual Studio 2010 or later because NET Framework 4 0 or NET Framework compatible with NET Framework 4 0 is required PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION PARAMETER SETTINGS INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 2 5 Operating Environment 2 8 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1 Instructions for personal computer a PCI standard When a personal computer which is not compliant with the PCI or PCI Express st
289. t a device that can be used for the function Setting points are out of the range Check the range of the setting point and Input Setting data are not input Input a setting data It cannot communicate XX YY Error code ZZ signed decimal Refer to the error list of MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Channel information is not register e Update the parameter again e Restart the developing environment personal computer e Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B It is fail to get the channel information Update the parameter again e Restart the developing environment personal computer e Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B Device data are out of the range Check the setting of the device data Device No is not input Input a device number Device No is out of the range e Check the device number and set e Check the block number of the specified device device type e Check if the specified device and block number are valid for the specified target Points are not input Input a point Network No is not input Input a network number Network No is out of the range Check the range of the network number and input Block No Network No is not input Input a block number Block No Network No is out of the range Check the range of the block number and input The necessary information is not found at the time of starting up Install
290. t apalensighyile Revert a Avenacaracnlal App 10 Appendix 2 2 Network status at board reset nha aieastcaacasSa anf Bal bain AymocayindayidtagalabancasabaZecn dave acs facaceenimcaiabnia ace teva dave lacetababetacasavecateva App 15 Appendix 3 File Output ETETETT TETTETETT TEELT TETTETETT asa a aicavauevaveacauat aca7agasasatnva aiagay tie auaaqe ecal nar enala a afaaerauapalmsauntanatapats App 16 Appendix 3 1 Parameter file Sr apayagata ayia catalinyaceyauee sain aca palaok o suahadan a in aun ayatazacsasn eiayacaya farage ais aka goat qaendnus ainv aun ale egalsar eral aca a7aseaue aimnaualecarapats App 16 Appendix 3 2 SB SW file shai Pf Sa mya fafa Smo ry aa a ryt apm fmf aan hapa nas Gra a ayaa App ms 17 Appendix 3 3 Error log file ai di ast ara hamid cama oa tri Rana Pc lh Fp Som tw wt Sw a Waa Ga a gh wo aa ae a a App 5 19 Appendix 3 4 Verification result file Yasai nama savas sasha ine ca at a asa acer aia avabet aces cue siik acat asavane avdlar sya aaa ala auslaseaca ea acavehauer aime Sunfasat cami asaseaalavatar ais App 20 Appendix 4 Comparison with the MELSECNET H Board secsreesesasanersseaseeanesansreserearaseeansseneretat App 21 Appendix 4 1 Comparison of boards wenden teva Caenearataencaienn doininnnsatn asnieiaintnie inns cw asd iesniia s aretecatatayatiaveushe acatacsiaia arsiatess dace uae Binrataiarntecaterntats App 21 Appendix 4 2 Comparison of MELSECNET utilities TEEPETETTETETEEETETETEPETTEEEEEEEEETETTEEEETTET E
291. t conditions are met 7 Keeping application portability with MELSECNET H board Z2 By only changing settings such as the total number of boards CC Link IE Controller 25 Network boards installed to a personal computer and channel numbers any existing user program created by a MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 board can be utilized 8 Drivers are available for each OS 2 Since various types of drivers are available a system suitable to the user environment 2 can be easily constructed g For details on the compatible operating system refer to Section 2 5 2 9 User programming functions are available With supported Microsoft Visual Basic and Microsoft Visual C functions remote control of programmable controllers and device reading writing can be 2 performed and user programs can be created easily 5 m 10 Supporting Multiple CPU system By specifying a logical station number with the CC IE Control utility a multiple CPU system is accessible PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION PARAMETER SETTINGS INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 1 2 Features 1 4 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 System Configuration Using CC Link IE Controller Network Board A system configuration where the CC Link IE Controller Network board is installed to a personal computer is shown below r o
292. t installed install the board If the board is already installed check the board installation status and reinstall the board e Reinstall the software package MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY Is the driver name of the board not displayed e If the board operates normally on other personal on the Device Manager screen computer the personal computer may have any problems In this case repair or replace the personal computer If the board does not operate normally on other personal computer replace the board The board installation failed PROGRAMMING e Reinstall the software package e Check the board installation status and reinstall the board Is displayed next to the icon on the e If the board operates normally on other personal Device Manager screen computer the personal computer may have any problems In this case repair or replace the APPLICATION FUNCTIONS personal computer e If the board does not operate normally on other personal computer replace the board If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to 7 Section 14 9 2 is displayed next to the icon however the CC Link IE Controller Network board is recognized normally 4 4 MELSECNET G Device gt PCI MELSECNET G Controller LGOTA ONE Y ERROR CODES EIPOINT Do not uninstall or disable the driver of the board on the Device Manager when the board is normally recognized If it is uninstalled or disabled
293. t source Network No 1 is set for the relay station 2 the one which is the closest to the request target The routes to both the request target Network No 4 and the request source Network No 1 are set for the relay station 3 the one other than 1 and 2 Request source Relay station 1 Relay station 3 Relay station 2 C Network No 1 Network No 2 Network No 3 A M Network No 4 Request target 12 10 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 12 1 2 Routing function 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 4 POINT 1 When networks are connected in a loop as shown in the figure below make sure to set the routing parameters so that the same relay stations are routed for both the route from the request source to the request target and the route back from the request target to the request source Do not set the parameters so that the route to and from goes around the entire loop Since the first relay station in the return path from the request target is determined by the station relayed in the forward path data cannot be transferred to a station in the different path which results in an error DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY A indicates the path from the request source to the request target B and C indicate the path from the re
294. t tell if the software has been modified since it was published The publisher s identity cannot be verified because of a problem The signature contains a time stamp However the time stamp could not be verified Do you still want to install this driver software No More Info Security Alert Driver Installation The driver software you are installing for MELSEC CC Link IE Control Controller For Windows Server 2003 R2 the screen shown on the left is has not been properly signed with Authenticade TM technology Therefore Windows cannot tell if the software has been modified since it was published The publisher s identity cannot be verified because of a problem displayed A certificate signing or issuer has expired Click the Yes button and continue the installation Do you still want to install this driver software Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Bead curpnaci polen For operating system of Windows XP Service Pack2 or later the confirmation Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for screen for connection to Windows Update may be displayed software O Yes this time only Q Yes now and ever tine connect a device Select No not this time and cl
295. ta a piii 3 Select Administrative Tools gO System and Security Network and Internet Hardware and Sound bleshoat common computer problems Windows Firewall Programs Check firewall status Allow a program through Windows Firewall wy e Clock Language and Region Windows Update Ease of Access Turn automatic updating on er off Checkforupdates View installed updates Power Options Changebattey settings Require a password when the computer wakes Changewhatthe powerbuttons do Change when the computer sleeps Dfa Backup and Restore Back upyourcomputer Restorefiles from backup Windows Anytime Upgrade Get more features wit with a new edition of Windows 7 drive ns View event logs Schedule tasks To the next page App 35 Appendix 9 Warning Message Appears on Windows Appendix 9 2 Methods for preventing the warning message APPENDICES i CELSE From the previous page YD Show details CEJ ees Change when these notifications appear ao 4 a 4 Select Local Security Policy Z oll El IE gt Cantrol Pana System and Security gt Ademiistrative Tools HA CES P a Ww ME Doty B cee sees aee a a REMARKS m Bons Roe x p Shortcut 2KB G E Recent Places ay Data Sources ODBC 2009 07 14 13 Shortcut 2KB a H Beever amorar Stonest 2r When user account control is enabled the following E libraries isCSTInitiator 20
296. tant link scan L RAS functions Control station switching function Loopback function Automatic return function Cable fault detection function Cable insertion error detection function Detection of duplicated control station or station number __ Prevention of station failure by using external power supply Offline test Driver WDT function Cyclic transmission function Periodical communication Transient transmission Communication function function Non periodical Routing function communication Group function Changing number of transient transmissions Read from write to other station devices SEND RECV function 4 1 Function List Event Setting FUNCtion rereere eee a aaa aaa e aa a a R gt K CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Section 1 2 Features Section 5 4 Wiring Section 5 5 Test Section 4 3 Driver WDT function Section 11 2 Cyclic Transmission EF Section 12 1 1 Communication function Section 12 1 2 Routing function E Section 12 1 3 Group function lt CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual lt 7 Section 12 1 4 SEND RECV function Section 12 2 Event Setting Function 4 FUNCTIONS 4 2 Specifications on Cyclic Transmission Processing This section explains the cyclic transmission processing using the CC Link IE Controller gt Network board in the CC Link IE Controller Network w e 4 2
297. tation Section 8 5 3 Executes logging for transmission path switch and transient Logging Section 8 5 4 8 1 Overview transmission error of the specified station 8 1 1 List of functions 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 2 Operating Procedure if This section explains the operating procedure of the CC IE Control utility S i gt e Connect the personal computer to the CC Link IE Controller Network lt Section 5 1 Procedure before gt Operation Ke Start the CC IE Control utility tees lt Section 8 2 1 Starting the utility E 0 o Set the channel number and operation settings network type mode 2 5 network number group number and station number of the target gt Section 8 4 1 Parameter setting nO board on the Parameter setting screen screen When the station is used as a control station set the parameterson lt Section 8 4 2 Network range a the Network range assignment screen assignment cch z Set the parameters on the Routing parameter setting screen for t Section 8 4 4 Routing parameter 2 accessing the other network re a o setting screen D y D Set the parameters on the Driver setting screen for setting f 2 F Driver WDT monitoring time and Transient timeout monitoring time Section 6 46 Driver soning Seen y Set the parameters on the Event setting screen for using the f 2 a event tinc
298. tatus SBO065 is OFF e No station has a parameter error Parameter status of each station SBOOEO is OFF e The number of actually connected stations is the same as the total number of stations except for reserved stations set on the control station After any of the above conditions was not met if all the conditions are met again the normal connection information will be updated Ex POINT 1 After acquisition of the normal connection information if the network configuration is changed with a cable or station disconnected the changed network configuration cannot be displayed correctly Update the normal connection information by the following If the network has an error however the normal connection information cannot be obtained Therefore the screen display is as in the case where the normal connection information has not been obtained e Turn ON Normal connection information refresh instruction SBOOOC K5 CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual e Power OFF and then ON or reset the connected station e Take corrective actions to set all stations into normal state 2 If a station that is not included in the normal connection information is added the station is displayed on the IN side of the connected station For acquisition of the normal connection information there are restrictions on the version of the CC Link IE Controller Network module on the connected station Check the version of the CC Link
299. tching of the communication path is referred to as path switching The following describes the path switching conditions checking method of path switching occurrence and access examples of path switching a Path switching conditions When access is being processed under the following conditions access to the Redundant CPU is continued by path switching even though a communication error Occurs he Conditions for continued access Operation mode Backup mode Separate mode Redundant CPU specification Control system Standby system System A System B Note however that if a tracking error had already occurred at a start of communication access to the control system is not continued by path switching even if tracking is recovered after that 1 Includes the status in which either Redundant CPU is powered OFF or reset App 5 Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System SM1600 D1590 2 D1690 2 APPENDICES MELSEC b Checking method of path switching occurrence and access examples of path switching 1 Checking method of path switching occurrence When the system is communicating with the redundant system specified whether communication is continued by path switching due to communication error occurrence can be estimated Create a program that monitors the following special relay and special registers to check the occurrence of path switching lt Special relay and special registers
300. te to other station devices O O Appendix 4 Comparison with the MELSECNET H Board Appendix 4 1 Comparison of boards APPENDICES ag F 3 O 3 Comparison of the RAS functions 5 g CC Link IE Controller Ne Function MELSECNETI H board Se Network board WE Control station switching function O O Optical cable insertion error detection G x x function 5 Optical cable fault detection function O x Automatic return function O O 5 gt Lu Loopback function oO o a g Down station prevention function with O O e external power supply Transient transmission during CPU module O O error 2 Error detection time check of transient O O Z transmission z O Detection of duplicated station No control O O Y station at power on Driver WDT function O O 1 On the CC Link IE Controller Network board the own station is in the disconnected status between PC start up power ON and CC Link IE Controller Network board driver start up Loopback wo occurs After CC Link IE Controller Network board driver start up a connection returns and a 5 normal data link is established 2 5 On the MELSECNET H board after PC start up power ON normal data link is continued without a 5 executing loopback at other stations 4 Comparison of the diagnostics functions N A CC Link IE Controller A Function MELSECNET H board 8 Network board E Hardware test O O y Self loopba
301. the board or starting wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock damage to the product or malfunction After installation of the board and wiring attach the cover on the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock CAUTION Check the rated voltage and pin out before wiring to the external power supply cable and connect the cables correctly Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure Place the communication cable and the external power supply cable connected to the board in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cables may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the board or cables or malfunctions due to poor contact When disconnecting the cable from the board do not pull the cable by the cable part Pulling the cable connected to the board may result in malfunction or damage to the board or cable Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the personal computer Such foreign matter may cause a fire failure or malfunction Do not install the external power supply or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm 3 94 in or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Special skills and tools are required to connect the communication cable to the connector plug which is an
302. the cables 5 gt Section 5 4 Z Wire the network cables for the installed board lt m N P Setthe parameters Set the parameters p I Chapter 6 Ae Set the parameters and confirm them with the utility lt 2 FE v 20E 253 Check the network Check the network Section 5 5 Test the cable connection and data link on the network S oE ws 85 5 1 Procedure before Operation 5 z4 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION Execute a user program Execute a user program or utility Vv 5 2 5 1 Procedure before Operation MELSEC 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 5 2 Part Names and Settings This section explains each part name and setting of the CC Link IE Controller Network board OVERVIEW lt Q80BD J71GP21 SX gt CONFIGURATION SYSTEM RUNERR SPECIFICATIONS BD808C 318651 FUNCTIONS ol lt Q80BD J71GP21S SX gt WW a O re Ww a 12 2 z H W N a z lt iy gzz 300 OOF Wu BES Spi ano PARAMETER SETTINGS BD808C 317G51 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 5 2 Part Names and Settings 5 3 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION lt Q81BD J71GP21 SX gt BDBEC lt Q81BD J71GP21S SX gt
303. the operating system may shut down blue screen APPENDICES INDEX 14 3 When CC Link IE Controller Network Board did not Operate Normally 1 4 15 14 3 3 Checking on Device Manager screen 1 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 4 Flowchart when Data Link Failed The following shows a check flowchart although the CC Link IE Controller Network board control station and normal stations were connected the data link failed Start Check the LED on the CC Link IE Controller Network board YES Is the RUN LED ON EE Section 14 4 1 Flowchart when RUN LED is OFF YES Is the RUN LED flashing CE Section 14 4 6 Flowchart when RUN LED is flashing YES Is the SD RD LEDs OFF CE Section 14 4 2 Flowchart when SD RD LEDs are OFF Start the CC IE Control utility and select Diagnostics from the menu NO Could perform data link among the whole system Section 14 4 4 Flowchart when data link among whole system is disabled Section 14 4 5 Flowchart when data link to specific station is disabled Could perform data link to NO the specific station End 14 16 14 4 Flowchart when Data Link Failed 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 14 4 1 Flowchart when RUN LED is OFF x E zZ W gt OF An error occurred T Did the LED turn OFF N
304. the personal computer e The CC Link IE Controller Network board stops its operation and is disconnected from the network e The board is not reconnected even after the personal computer returns from the power save mode hibernate sleep e After the personal computer returns from the power save mode hibernate sleep 28141 9213H System sleep error occurs when accessing CC Link IE Controller Network board from the CC IE Control utility or an application program which includes MELSEC data link library function 3 Corrective action When the personal computer is set to enter the power save mode hibernate sleep the setting is changed by MELSECPowerManager For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to the following section K5 Appendix 11 Appendix 10 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup App 40 Appendix 10 2 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FUNCTIONS ERROR CODES gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES Appendix 10 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup App 41 Appendix 10 3 Behavior when the fast startup function is enabled 1 Target operating system The following operating systems have the fast startup function Windows Server 2012 e Windows Server 2012 R2
305. the procedure shown below y 1 Uninstall the board and check if the personal computer is started Z e Checking personal computer and operating system Section 14 4 1 z 2 After restarting the personal computer check if there is any error g e Checking on Event Viewer screen Section 14 3 2 ae 3 Install the board and restart the personal computer e Checking the board installation status Section 5 3 3 e Checking on Device Manager screen Section 14 4 3 If the troubleshooting above does not help refer to L5 Section 14 9 z After starting the personal computer on which the board is installed check the items a following the procedure written in Basic checking procedure Chapter 14 1 The system shutdown occurred when driver is uninstalled or disabled 3 Do not uninstall or disable the driver on the Device Manager screen when the board PZ is normally recognized 55 If it is uninstalled or disabled the operating system may shut down blue screen ai 14 3 1 Checking personal computer and operating system Check if the personal computer or operating system have any problems Item Corrective action Check the power outlet and power cable of the Is the power supply ensured personal computer e Change the installation location of the board Check the resource acquisition status of other Does the board operate normally if uninstall board and change the resource on the BIOS the other optional boards s
306. ther station s programmable controller or at special registers Cyclic transmission status of each station SWOOBO to SW00B7 4 When a CC Link IE Controller Network board is reconnected disconnected to the CC Link IE Controller Network the all station error may occur for the circuit control period Normal value 50ms Worst value 100ms If the all station error occurs an error is detected in the communication status baton pass status and the data link status cyclic transmission status of all station 5 Since the board is reset during the driver operation a brief loopback occur An error is also detected in the communication status baton pass status and the data link status cyclic transmission status 6 The circuit control period is a period to reconstruct the data link when the CC Link IE Controller Network board is reconnected disconnected such as when the cable is disconnected or the power is turned from OFF to ON DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FUNCTIONS ERROR CODES gt TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX Appendix 2 Network Status at Power ON OFF and Board Reset During Data Linking App 14 Appendix 2 1 Network status at power ON OFF APPENDICES Appendix 2 2 Network status at board reset The network status when the board reset from the utility or board reset from MELSEC data link library mdBdRst function mdBdModSet functi
307. ther than the method written in the troubleshooting in this manual The consistency between the driver and utility cannot be identified and CCLink IE Controller Network board may not operate properly A 13 INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Q80BD J71GP21 SX Q80BD J71GP21S SX Q81BD J71GP21 SX Q81BD J71GP21S SX CC Link IE Controller Network interface board Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q80BD J71GP21 SX Q80BD J71GP21S SX Q81BD J71GP21 SX Q81BD J71GP21S SX CC Link IE Controller Network interface board to handle the product correctly CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS H eniin e A ETE E anteater anual icnnaunn A 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT At rtre tr rAr E A rrr Eran E AEEA EREET AANER TE AE ERARE SAUN ERN TEE Ane REVISIONS et een nackte wr E darn an tn aa tea E E T S ey A 8 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE tite ce a i ae ee eon A 13 INTRODUCTION iiien ea ete hee ee errr ec ramen rere a A 14 CONTENTS errin accreted era sess AE OERA EEE E ana A E E En ERE ee emi nesta A 14 MANDA A E E E E E E E E atanRON A 20 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL s 5s Henan ee a ei A 21 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS rrii nie enen n E E A EE S A 22 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS nii tirienn tipe E meen EAE AA EATE E EEE A 23 PACKING LIS Th Ha niner rnan PE NA AEREE REEE id saac sag EN ARAE PERENA S CARERE EE na gacauntaiabacse vematendans A 23 CHAPTER
308. tically Do you continue the installation For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to the following appendix KL Appendix 11 MELSECPowerManager 77 Program Compatibility Assistant a This program might not have installed correctly ee ee ee ee If this screen is displayed during the installation or at the installation completion are compatible with this version of Windows Program Setup Launcher click This program installed correctly Q l Publisher InstallShield Software Corporation ii cca If this screen is displayed when the installation is aborted click the Cancel button and close the screen Reinstall using recommended settings Do not select Reinstall using recommended settings An incorrect module may This program installed correctly be installed Cancel What settings are applied gt Don t install this driver software You should check your manufacturer s website for updated driver software for your device Click Install this driver software anyway v See details 14 6 14 2 Troubleshooting of Installation Uninstallation 14 2 3 When the corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective at installation 4 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Screen Corrective action oc 2 ould you like to install this device software iaia aaae Confirm the publisher is MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
309. tion EF Section 8 4 7 Event setting screen 2 y 6 Set the parameters on the Target setting screen for using logical lt Section 8 4 8 Target setting screen station numbers E _ g 9 2 i Set the parameters on the Refresh parameter setting screen for 2 Section 8 4 9 Refresh parameter setting refresh ranges i a k A setting screen y Check the status of the network link and stations on the Section 8 5 1 CC Link IE D CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen Controller Network diagnostics O Yy result screen aw Check th th for communicati ith the specified station on th Z l eck the pa r communicating wi pecified station on the ar n send Communication test screen C Section 8 5 2 Communication g a test screen oS Execute the data link start stop for each station on the Link start stop is Screen lt Section 8 5 3 Link start stop screen ow ZE lt O Check the transmission path switch information and transient 2 F Section 8 5 4 Loggi Ot transmission errors on the Logging screen F Section 8 5 4 Logging screen ga A a0 QOF G25 Check the channel numbers on the Channel No confirm screen gt lt Section 8 3 2 Channel number BE w Y confirmation screen E D 5 Check the information on the CC Link IE Controller Network board on Section 8 3 3 Board detail the Board detail information screen nae information screen 9 y 0 End the CC IE Control utility
310. tion execute the test from the control station in the network system to which the normal station is connected This section explains CC Link IE Controller Network board For the setting of network module refer to the following manual lt CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual 1 Check for the power discontinuity Power OFF the personal computer Power OFF the module 2 Cable connection Connect optical fiber cables to OUT and IN of each station 3 Power ON Power ON the personal computer Power ON the module 5 22 5 5 Test 5 5 4 Circuit test 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 4 Test mode settings a Setting the executing station gt Set as follows on the Parameter setting screen of the CC IE Control utility Z 6 Network type CC IE Control Control station Mode Circuit test a Station No Station number for the executing station 5B Operational setting m T 26 nO Network type CCIE Control Control station Mode Circuit test X Setting 2 Network No 1 Group No 0 Station No 1 2 S ma O W ja N b Setting the target station In the network parameter of GX Works2 set the mode to Online 4 If the CC Link IE Controller Network board is the target station set as follows on the Parameter setting screen of the CC IE Control utility Network type CC IE Control Normal station Mode Online 5 Station No Station number for the target station 5 us
311. tion No 1 4 Network range assignment Driver setting Event setting Target setting Refresh parameter Check Default Load file Save file Verify End Cancel 1 Target board specification Select a number of CC Link IE Controller Network boards to be installed in the personal computer In the above screen two CC Link IE Controller Network boards are installed 2 Board Select the CC Link IE Controller Network board whose parameters to be set In the above screen the first CC Link IE Controller Network board is selected 3 Channel No Select a channel number to be assigned to the CC Link IE Controller Network board whose parameter is being set The channel numbers assigned to each CC Link IE Controller Network board can be checked on the board list screen start screen K5 Section 8 3 1 Board list screen 1 Valid setting range 151 to 154 6 2 6 1 Parameter Settings Board Information Settings 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC lt Assigning channel numbers to the CC Link IE Controller Network boards gt The followings are the cases for assigning channel numbers to the CC Link IE Controller Network boards a When the boards are activated for the first time after the software package is i installed 2 The channel numbers 151 to 154 are automatically assigned in the order of PCI slot number to the CC Link IE Controller Network boards installed to the personal 2 computer b Whe
312. tions e Windows XP Mode e Windows Touch or Touch e Modern UI 2 e Client Hyper V 2 Server Core Installation 2 m e Upgrade the operating system e When exiting the operating system always shut down the computer e The behavior of the board and the personal computer when the personal computer enters the power save mode differs according to the operating system For details of error codes and messages when the power save mode set by a user or a program is entered refer to the following appendix lt 5 Appendix 10 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION ag Mode or Fast Startup Eg e Upgrading the operating system is not supported Install SW1DNC Ze ol MNETG B by following the procedure shown below o 1 Uninstall SW1DNC MNETG B 2 Upgrade the operating system 7 3 Install SW1DNC MNETG B with the software version supporting the A g upgraded operating system 228 eeeeeeevoeoeeoeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 8 ZJ 250 85 2 5 Operating Environment 2 10 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 11 3 Instructions for user program a Supported version of SW1DNC MNETG B Supported version of User program SW1DNC MNETG B 32 bit version user program All versions 64 bit version user program 2 Version 1 12N or later 1 Programs can be created and executed on the 64 bit version operating system 2 Programs can be cr
313. tiples of 16 LY Start 0000 to 1FFO multiples of 16 End OOOF to 1FFF multiples of 16 1 3 SB SW cannot be selected for the refresh setting since they are accessed directly without the refresh process 8 4 9 Refresh parameter setting screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY MELSEC 8 5 Diagnostics Screen if This section explains about the screens which are used to check the link status and station gt status of the network m 6 8 5 1 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen Z O H This screen is displayed by clicking the button on the board list screen start 5 2 screen ae f lt Section 8 3 1 Board list screen 25 N CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result iE Select station Change select station aitmontor oO Board Network No 1 Total No of stations 2 I O master station Block1 0 Block2 0 Link scantime 2ms E Network type CC IE Control 2 e E Present Control S Assign Control Uu O W ja N Prev Next n Select station network device status display Test confirmation Group No 0 Mode Online E Communication test pan a eck he pa ihom comei saion res pe CC IE Control 2 Link start stop can operate station link Start Stop T r Information confirmation Logging Be en T mer and error log in u H u ed 9a 28 lt lt 23 W gt When two or more CC Link IE Controller Network boards are installed in the zg personal computer the fol
314. to be Monitored 575e 9 6 Setting a Monitor Target EEN E A E 9 5 Single Network System 070eee eenen 2 2 2 5 12 10 Specifying 1 0 master station eeeeeeeeeeeteee eere 6 15 Specifying reserved stations e eeeeeeeeeerere ereere 6 16 Standards Low Voltage Directive eeeeeeeeeeeeeereerteee App 45 Starting the utility A E E E E E 8 4 9 2 Station to station testte eette eetere r errr rrrr rrr e ee 5 25 Supplementary setting E E etacawatedeeeuy 12 3 Supplementary setting sereentv oven en etenn 8 20 Supplementary Settings wee 6 21 Switching a Display Format wee ee 9 11 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION wee 2 1 T Target setting SCreenN Eee 8 25 8 27 Target Settings r a AE T A Ae fataeeara 6 24 6 25 Total number of link stations 77e eee ee eee 6 15 Transient Transmission Function 07e 12 2 TROUBLESHOOTING ween eee 14 1 Tuning Bit Devices ON and OFF 0 9 9 W Wiring external power supply cable veteen 5 15 Index 2 Warranty Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the custom
315. to read parameters The probable causes are e Parameters have not been set e There is a problem in the operating system e Write the parameters e Check the H W failure on the CC Link IE Controller Network board The network No setting value is outside the range Please input the value within the range 1 239 Set the value for the network number within the range of 1 to 239 The group No setting value is outside the range Please input the value within the range 0 32 Set the value for the group number within the range of 0 to 32 The station No setting value is wrong Please input a value in the range XX YY Set the value for the station number within the range of XX to YY The channel No XX is overlapping Please correct the settings Set the channel numbers not to overlap The network No XX is overlapping Please correct the settings Set the network numbers not to overlap Unable to open the specified file e Check the specified file The total number of characters for the file location and file name should be less than 128 The specified file is not a CC IE Control utility parameter file Check the specified file The specified file cannot be read The utility version is different from the CC IE Control utility version Install the utility same version as the CC IE Control utility in which the file was created Failed to save the parameter file Confirm the dest
316. to set logical station numbers for accessing the multiple CPU system or redundant CPU system a O Target setting 0 Target setting m TE 02S stator tip Network No Station No Multiple PLC Redundant PLC Do 12 aa fe z o me O W ja n n za O in Item Description Default Setting range x Enter a logical station number to be set or w Logical station No 0 to 239 gt changed 5 Network No Set a network number of the access target 1 to 239 Sr Set a station number of the network module aa Station No that is controlled by the multiple CPU system 1 to 120 z l or redundant CPU system me y Specify the CPU number in the multiple CPU No specification Multiple PLC system of the access target CPU CPU NO 1 to CPU NO 4 aa No specification 25 ESDP Control system rage Specify the system specification for the aS Redundant PLC Standby system AOE redundant system of the access target CPU uzg System A BER System B Too Clear Batch deletes the target settings n Check Checks the target settings g Reflects the settings and closes the Target 22 End oem setting screen 23 we Without reflecting the settings closes the db Cancel ee EE a 255 Target setting screen 250 oe 1 Logical station numbers are logical numbers that are set to station numbers in the Device monitor utility and user program MELSEC data link function library Logical station n
317. tor s authority e Installation and uninstallation are available only by the administrator s authority e The Usage of utilities is available only by the administrator s authority c NET Framework 3 5 When using one of the following operating system NET Framework 3 5 is required e Windows Server 2012 e Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 e Windows 8 1 Enable the NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 or 3 0 in Turn Windows features on or off on the control panel 2 9 2 5 Operating Environment 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION d Update Windows 8 1 Updating Windows 8 1 is not supported When updating Windows 8 1 install SW1DNC MENTG B with the software Version 1 17T or later after uninstalling the software package and updating Windows 8 1 OVERVIEW e The functions cannot be used The following functions of operating system cannot be used If an attempt is made to use any of the following functions this product may not operate normally z O E q gt 9 Es zZ e Oo SYSTEM e Activating the application with Windows compatible mode e Simplified user switch over e Remote desktop e Large font size Advanced setting of screen property 7 e DPI setting other than 100 set the size of text and illustration other than smaller 100 lt e Power save mode Standby Hibernate Sleep i e Fast startup a e The language switching function set by Regional and Language Op
318. trol station Ns Normal station b Symbol format Mp Station number 1 to 120 Abbreviation Network No 1 to 239 1 Network No 3 control station and station number 6 3MP6 Example 2 Network No 5 normal station and station number 3 5Ns3 PACKING LIST The packing list of the CC Link IE Controller Network board is given below Item eE TALS Board 1 Connector set for external power supply cable Q80BD J71GP21S SX Q81BD J71GP21S SX only 1 Before Using the Product 1 Software package CD ROM 1 Software license agreement 1 4 Manuals are stored on the CD ROM in PDF format A 23 1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW This manual explains the specifications functions preparatory procedures and setting programming and troubleshooting of the CC Link IE Controller Network board When applying program examples introduced in this manual to the actual system it is necessary to perform a sufficient examination to make sure they don t cause any error in the system control For construction of the CC Link IE Controller Network refer to the following manual K5 CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual 1 1 Overview The CC Link IE Controller Network board allows connection of a personal computer to a CC Link IE Controller Network realizing high speed and large volume data communications between the computer and programmable controllers naa High speed
319. trol utility e The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B e Restart the CC IE Control utility e The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B e Restart the CC IE Control utility e The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B Enter the station number other than the reserved station Retrieving window creation failed Network diagnostics will now end No CC Link IE Controller Network board in connecting station Diagnostics will now end Network information screen creation failed Network diagnostics will now end Creation of network information display failed Network diagnostics will now end Entered station No is reserved station number Entered station No does not exist on network Enter the station number exists on the network oat Enter the station number other than the disconnected station Entered Sta No is disconnected station number Enter value within the range from 1 to 120 Enter the value within the range of 1 to 120 Board is not Online mode Please set Online mode Set the board to Online mode Network parameters are not set correctly Saline neworeparemelrscancel y After setting network parameters please execute again 1 3 7 13 1 List of Error Messages in CC IE Control Utility 13 1 3 Error messages displayed on the diagnostics screen 1 3 ERROR CODES
320. troller Network module under control of the High Performance model QCPU by connecting peripherals to the Universal model QCPU a Transient transmission to a station on the same network 1Mp1 1Ns2 1Ns3 Gee ona g C Network No 1 I 1Ns6 1Ns5 1Ns4 b Transient transmission to a station on another network routing function When accessing a station on another network the routing parameter setting is required for the request source and the relay stations Request Request source target 1Mp1 1Ns3 3Mp1 3Ns2 E te Jresuted Required l l C Network No 1 iC Network No 3 J zE Lr Relay station Relay station 1Ns6 1Ns5 1Ns4 2M1 2Ns3 rF 3Ns4 3Ns3 C Network No 2 Stations that the routing parameter setting is required 1 2 2 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 12 1 1 Communication function 1 Supplementary setting Set the execution conditions for the transient transmission Supplementary setting Constant scan 500 ms Block data assurance per station Transient setting M Punctuality is guaranteed Maximum No of transients in one station 2 Times a Constant scan Set a time for constant link scan
321. tting value is outside the range Set the value for the station number within the range of 0 to 9 Please input a value within the range 0 120 120 9 The logical station number XX is overlapping a y Set the logical station numbers not to overlap Z Please correct the settings A Specification of PLC is unsuitable Please specify PLC Specify the programmable controller CPU Z 9 Refresh parameter setting screen 5 Error message Corrective action z Link side number of points is out of range Set the value for link side number of points within the range of Set it within the range of XX to YY XX to YY 3 Link side start device No is out of range Set the value for link side start device number within the range Set it within the range of XX to YY of XX to YY Link side end device No is out of range Set the value for link side end device number within the range Set it within the range of XX to YY of XX to YY i Device setting is overlapping O i Set the device ranges not to overlap O Correct these settings Z lt x W Q zZ 13 1 List of Error Messages in CC IE Control Utility 13 6 13 1 2 Error messages displayed on the setting screen 1 3 ERROR CODES 13 1 3 Error messages displayed on the diagnostics screen 1 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen e Restart the CC IE Control utility e The installation of SW1DNC MNETG B may be failed Reinstall SW1DNC MNETG B e Restart the CC IE Con
322. tween them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Use a specified tool for crimping of the cable and contacting pin Imperfect crimping may cause a malfunction Verify the pin out and fully insert the crimped contacting pin into the connector Imperfect insertion may cause a failure or malfunction Insert the wired external power supply cable into the external power supply cable connector until a click is heard Imperfect insertion may cause a failure or malfunction 5 12 5 4 Wiring 5 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERATION 5 4 1 Controller network system The following explains precautions for connecting the optical fiber cables with the CC Link a IE Controller Network board i O 1 Precautions for connection a Use the dedicated optical fiber cable shown below for the controller network system z 23 g Multi mode fiber GI QG series Mitsubishi electric system amp service Co Ltd 2D b When connecting an optical fiber cable to the CC Link IE Controller Network board the cable bend radius is restricted g For details check the specifications of the cable used 2 q 9 c When laying the optical fiber cables do not touch the fiber cores of the cable side i and board side connectors and protect them from dirt and dust T If oil from the hand dirt or dust is attached to the core it can increase transmission loss causing a problem in data link d When connecting or disconnecti
323. u File Action View Help 9 HiSes Em gt aun Oh Services Local MELSECPowerManager Start the service Name Gi Media Center Extender S Microsoft NET Framew Gi Microsoft NET Framew Microsoft NET Framew Ok Microsoft NET Framew D Microsoft iSCSI Initiator Gi Microsoft Software Sha Gi Multimedia Class Sched D Net Msmgq Listener Ada Ch Net Pipe Listener Adapter Oj Net Tcp Listener Adapter Gk Net Tcp Port Sharing Se Gi Netlogon Z Network Access Protecti D Network Connections h Network List Service Z Network Location Awar T Network Store Interface Z Office Source Engine Offline Files I Parental Controls Description Status Allows Med ex Stop Pause Resume Restart All Tasks Refresh Properties Help The Networ Manages o Identifies th Collects an This service Started Started Started Started The Offline This service Started Automatic D Manual Manual Automatic Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Manual yn W A Q O re az uw Log On As o Local Service Local System S Local System I Local System N Local System c Local System a Local System a Local System x Network Servic Local Service Local Service A Manual Manual Manual Automatic Automatic Manual Automatic Manual Local Service Local System Network S
324. umber of the CC Link IE Controller Network board 1 Valid setting range 1 to 120 2 Precaution Do not set a same station number in the same network INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 6 1 Parameter Settings Board Information Settings 6 7 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 6 2 Parameter Setting Example The following shows the parameter setting example of the CC Link IE Controller Network board 1 System example Control Station 1Me1 port No 151 CC Link IE Controller Network Network No 1 1Ns2 to 1Ns8 2 Setting screen Settings for Control station 1MpP1 Parameter setting m Target board specification Board1 Board2 M Boad3 M Board4 Routing parameter Board 1 z Channel No 151 v Operational setting J7 Network type CCIE Control Contral station v Mode Online Network No 1 Group No 0 Station No 1 a Network range assignment Driver setting Event setting Target setting Refresh parameter Check Default L Load file Save file Verify Cancel 6 8 6 2 Parameter Setting Example 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS 6 3 Network Range Assignment Settings if This function is used to set cyclic transmission ranges of devices LB LW LX and LY that gt can be sent by each station in a single network connected to t
325. umbers are used when accessing from the target board channel number to the other station CPU other CPU modules of multiple CPU system or system specified CPU module of redundant CPU system When directly accessing the CPU module that controls other stations station number 1 to 120 and their CC Link IE Controller Network module use not logical numbers but station numbers used for CC Link IE Controller Network 5 c e Ss o 8 4 Setting Screen 8 25 8 4 8 Target setting screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY MELSEC POINT When a CC Link IE Controller Network board with a serial number whose first five digits are 10091 or lower or an SW1DNC MNETG B with the software version 1 04E or earlier is used the redundant CPU system cannot be accessed directly with the CC Link IE Controller Network interface board Relay the MELSECNET H network system to access the redundant CPU system 8 26 8 4 Setting Screen 8 4 8 Target setting screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 4 9 Refresh parameter setting screen if This screen is displayed by clicking the Refresh parameter button on the Parameter gt setting screen gt CF Section 8 4 1 Parameter setting screen It is used to set device ranges to execute refreshes Refresh parameter setting Assignment method R C Points Stat amp o
326. unication count T Count WT 5 Second Communication test result n za O O m W u X Sa S I lt A O us aw ZE ae 12 goz age Of Sn ano yn o as 2 QO ER zy Tt Za lt 2 B26 250 oe 5 i e Ss o 8 5 Diagnostics Screen 8 37 8 5 2 Communication test screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 5 3 Link start stop screen This screen is displayed by clicking the Link start stop button on the CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen Section 8 5 1 CC Link IE Controller Network diagnostics result screen It is used to start and stop the data link of the specified station Link start stop x Network info Network CCIE Control Network No 1 Type Net control station between controllers Group No 0 Station No 1 ia Control Station Normal Station All station status z 1 Linking 0 2 Linking 0 l 5 Select all Cancel Select all Link start stop Link start Link stop C Force link start Close Item Description Display content Network info Displays the information of the selected network own station Network Displays the name of the selected network own station CC IE Control Controller network A i control station Type Displays the station type of the selected network own station Controller network normal station
327. utt LW1FEFF j l D J ll LI Network range assignment RES pes 3 aam Deed Monitoringtime 2000 ms Total stations 4 C Pointssstt t Points Stat StatEnd switch screens LB LW setings Specify 1 0 master station Specify reserved station Equal assignment Supplementary seting Clear 6 3 Network Range Assignment Settings 6 3 1 LB LW settings 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS 6 3 2 LX LY settings For each block set an I O master station and I O ranges used in the cyclic transmission a between the I O master and relevant stations i e 1 Setting LX LY settings 1 and LX LY settings 2 separately Set LX LY settings 1 as block 1 and LX LY settings 2 as block 2 gt HIPOINT E e The LX LY points for each station must be set to the maximum link points ir 8192 points or less which are total points of LX LY settings 1 and DS LX LY settings 2 e Avoid duplication of the LX LY settings for each station in LX LY settings 1 and LX LY settings 2 2 e When a network module is set as an I O master station the ranges for B block 1 and block 2 should not overlap with actual I O numbers I O E O number range of the actually installed module of installed CPU module m n CPU device Link device LXILY setting 1 LXILY setting 2 2 A T 5 Overlap Rosa Pagi 5 4 De Block 1 i N PQQ an
328. vent settings Reflects the settings and closes the Event End _ setting screen Without reflecting the settings closes the cancel Event setting screen 1 Set the device number and device points 1 not to exceed the range of device number 2 Cannot be set when the Event condition is set to Change 3 The following table indicates the combination of the event settings and timing of the event occurrence Detection pr a Device code Event condition Timing of event occurrence method Level detect ON While ON Level detect OFF While OFF LB LX SB oa Edge detect ON At rising pulse Edge detect OFF At falling pulse Level detect Equal When setting values match Level detect Unequal When setting values mismatch When setting values match Edge detect Equal for first detection only LW SW z 5 When setting values mismatch Edge detect Unequal for first detection only When previous setting values Change mismatch POINT When the multiple events occur at the same time smaller setting number is the priority to be notified 8 24 8 4 Setting Screen 8 4 7 Event setting screen 8 CC IE Control UTILITY 8 4 8 Target setting screen This screen is displayed by clicking the Target setting button on the Parameter setting screen u CF Section 8 4 1 Parameter setting screen It is used
329. vice Extended function 9 mdTypeRead Reads the type of programmable controller CPU mdControl Remote operation of programmable controller CPU RUN STOP PAUSE hs mdWaitBdEvent Waits for an event occurrence F mdBdRst Resets the board mdBdModSet Sets the mode of the board mdBdModRead Reads the mode of the board mdBdLedRead Reads the LED information of the board z ep mdBdSwRead Reads the switch status of the board Es mdBdVerRead Reads the version information of the board 59 oe mdinit Refreshes the programmable controller device address aie Batch writes devices mdSend Sends data SEND function Batch reads devices D mdReceive 7 S Receives data RECV function O 8 mdRandW Writes devices randomly a mdRandR Reads devices randomly E mdDevSet Sets a bit device mdDevRst Resets a bit device 1 Supported by the 1 08J or later version of SW1DNC MNETG B 2 A function in which the access range is extended according to the extension of the device points at the access target It is accessible to all device numbers n Use extended functions when creating a new program a fe Y POINT For details of the functions refer to the following manual lt MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual N W 9 Q Pa W g fo lt lt W Q zZ 1 1 PROGRAMMING CHAPTER 11 PROGRAMMING 11 1 Precautions on Programming B0020 Device This section explains the precautions on
330. work No 3 Length 100 Byte Station No 4 Communication count 1 Count W D T 5 Second Communication test result Outward Inward Network No No 1 No 2 No3 m Own station f Communication information Destination station Network No 1 Communication count 1 Count Network No 3 Station No 3 Communication time 0 100ms Station No 4 Close 5 28 5 5 Test 5 5 6 Communication test 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS CHAPTER 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS It is necessary to set the parameters using the CC IE Control utility in order to operate the CC Link IE Controller Network The following is a flow chart for setting parameters Board information settings 1 Channel No 151 to 154 Operational settings 1 Network type Control station Normal station 2 Mode Such as Online and Offline 3 Network No 1 to 239 4 Group No 0 to 32 5 Station No Network range assignment settings 1 LB LW settings 2 LX LY settings 3 Total number of link stations Set the followings as necessary 1 I O master station settings 2 Reserved station settings 3 Driver settings 4 Supplementary settings Set the followings as necessary 1 Routing parameter settings 2 Event settings 3 Target settings when accessing the multiple CPU system or redundant CPU system 4 Refresh parameter settings Write parameters to the personal c
331. y large values 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 1 2 3 12 1 1 Communication function DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY ye PROGRAMMING z F q0 OF ae zs are ERROR CODES APPENDICES TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 2 Transient transmission range In a multiple network system of the CC Link IE Controller Network communication can be performed with a station in a maximum of eight networks away by setting the routing parameters Section 12 1 2 Routing function Relay station 1 Relay station 2 Relay station 3 Foon fella odes ffl Pas pea om Relay station 4 QCPU 4Ns2 5Mp1 ed computer Network No 4 Network No 6 G G 7 3 Relay station 5 G 2 2 xX Relay station 6 Y Q Z Z Cy Z 2 Z ty 4 Relay station 7 ona Network No 9 Network No 8 pans excl eas O Transient transmission possible X Transient transmission not possible 1 2 4 12 1 Transient Transmission Function 12 1 1 Communication function 1 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MELSEC Transient transmission valid range x oe O The following table shows the valid ranges of trans
332. y format For changing a device type refer to the following section KE Section 9 6 Setting a Device to be Monitored For changing a display format refer to the following section K Section 9 9 Switching a Display Format 3 Data format 1 The number of displayed columns will differ depending on the settings of a connection target CPU and display format 9 3 9 3 Setting the Batch Monitor Function Q DEVICE MONITOR UTILITY e 9 4 Setting the 16 point Register Monitor Function This section explains the method for monitoring multiple devices simultaneously in units of 16 points This function can monitor up to five types of bit devices and one type of word device double word device simultaneously fA O E z O Wu 8 gt W se z 1 Selecting the menu l Select Menu 16 point register monitor Bee me at ai re i wa 2 Display screen Device Monitor Utility Menu Setting Device Write Data Format Option Help x 0000 of 0000 B 0000 SB 0000 Sw 0000 o x 0001 olf 0001 B0001 _ o SB 0001 Sw 0001 zZ x lt 0002 Oy 0002 B 0002 SB 0002 Sw 0002 x 0003 off 0003 B 0003 jO SB 0003 sw 0003 Ix 0004 Oy 0004 B 0004 0 SB 0004 sw 0004 E x 0005 oj 0005 B 0005 OSB 0005 sw 0005 O x lt 0006 olf 0006 B 0006 055 0006 Sw 0006 O x 0007 oj 0007 B 0007 SB 0007 SW 0007 w
333. y is guaranteed Maximum No of transients in one station 2 Times 2 E O ow raa T wy W Sa RSE WZ ore ano ep fr ae wo 2 As awn INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES CC IE Control UTILITY 6 6 Supplementary Settings 6 21 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 6 7 Driver Settings This function is used to set the refresh cycle of the cyclic transmission and monitoring time of the transient transmission The driver settings are set on the Driver setting screen in the CC IE Control utility Section 8 4 6 Driver setting screen Driver setting r Driver WDT monitoring time J Use driver WDT function Current value ims Setting value 1Ums m Transient timeout monitoring time Current value 15 X Setting value 15 r Link refresh cycle Current value 0 mE Setting value 15 T 6 22 6 7 Driver Settings 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC 6 8 Event Settings This function is used to set the conditions for monitoring link device changes using the CC Link IE Controller Network board to notify events to the user program The event settings are set on the Event setting screen in the CC IE Control utility CF Section 8 4 7 Event setting screen Event setting Event setting Input format Event Word device condition setting value Clear Check Cancel 6 8 Event Settings 6 23 SYSTEM PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE OPERAT
334. yte StationNo 2 Communication count 1 Count 2 wy fExecute testi ce z send eee Communication test result Gutward Inward Network No a No 2 Own Destination Own station Communication information Destination station NetwotkNo T Communication count 1 Count NetwotkNo 1 Station No Communication time 0 100ms Station No Zz Close Item Description Set Display Communication test details Set the communication target and communication data Network No Set a network number of the communication target 1 to 239 Set a station number of the communication target Station No 0 to 120 0 I O master station 1 to 120 control station and normal stations Length Set a data length of the communication data 1 to 900 Communication count Set a number of communications 1 to 100 W D T Set a time out time of the communication test 1 to 100 Execute test Executes the communication test Communication test result Displays the communication target and communication data Displays the network number and station number that was relayed on lt lt Outward gt gt the outward from the own station connected station to the specified station Displays the network number and station number that was relayed on lt lt Inward gt gt the inward from the own station connected station to the specified station Displays the network number that was relayed at loopback from the Network No Si 1 to 239 own station connect

CC-Link IE Controller Network Interface Board User's Manual (For

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents